BILL OF QUANTITIES - Meru Countymeru.go.ke/file/20150503_tender_for_construction_of_governor_s... · proposed governor’s mansion for the meru county at meru contract ref: mcg/ont/002/2014-2015

PROPOSED GOVERNOR’S MANSION

FOR

THE MERU COUNTY

AT MERU

CONTRACT REF: MCG/ONT/002/2014-2015

____________________BILL OF QUANTITIES

ARCHITECTS STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS SERVICES ENGINEERSK&M Archplans

P. O. Box 76240 - 00508NAIROBI

Xenocon ConsultingEngineers

P. O. Box 59385 - 00200NAIROBI

Mecoy Consultants LtdP. O. Box 53086 - 00200

NAIROBI

QUANTITY SURVEYORS

Constingconsult LtdP. O. Box 51509 - 00200

NAIROBI

FEBRUARY 2015

ii

TENDER DOCUMENTS AND BILLS OF QUANTITIES

Consisting of From To

1. Signature Page iii iii

2. Form of Tender iv v

3. Tender Bond vi vi

4. Instruction to tenderers IT/0 IT/5

5. Pre/Post qualification Forms TQ/0 PGB/2

6. Section 1 Conditions of Contract CC/1 CC/23

Appendix to Conditions of Contract ACC/1 ACC/3

7. Section 2 Trade Preambles and Specifications Spec/0 Spec/64

8. Section 3 BILLS OF QUANTITIES

(i) Preliminaries 1/0 1/29

(ii) Main House 2/0 2/26

(iii) Servant Quarters 3/0 3/17

(iv) Changing Rooms 4/0 4/14

(v) Ablution Block 5/0 5/12

(vi) External Works 6/0 6/13

(vii) P.C & Provisional Sums 7/0 7/2

(viii) Summary Summary Page

Appendix – List of Drawings

iii

TENDER FOR THE CONSTRUCTION AND COMPLETION OF THE PROPOSEDGOVERNOR’S MANSION FOR MERU COUNTY IN MERU

BILLS OF QUANTITIES

Prepared as part of the Contract Documents for the Proposed Mansion for the Governor of Meru

County.

Prepared by Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors & Project Managers

P. O Box 51509 – 00200

NAIROBI

The Contract for the aforementioned works entered into on the …………… day of …………………

2015 by the undersigned parties refers to these Bills of Quantities consisting of those pages numbered

on page ii and the drawings attached which shall be read and construed as part of the said contract.

………………………………………… ………………………………………….

(Contractor) (Employer)

………………………………………… ………………………………………….

(Date) (Date)

iv

The County SecretaryMeru CountyP O Box 120 - 60200MERU

FORM OF TENDER


I/We, the undersigned, having read the drawings, conditions of contract, conditions of tendering, thespecification and the Bills of Quantities delivered to me/us do offer to construct fully, complete andmaintain the whole of the works described for the sum of Kenya Shillings (in Words)…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

(Kshs ……………………………………………..)

I / We, further agree to deliver the whole of the works compete within the contract period of………………………………………….. ( ……………..) Calendar Weeks.

Further, I/We agree if our tender is accepted, to provide a Performance Bond to the Meru CountyGovernment of Kenya shillings (In words).…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………(Kshs. …………………………………) being 10% of our tender sum, within 14 days of the letter ofacceptance and within validity period of the Tender Bond.

Further, I/We, agree to provide all the necessary insurance policies described within 14 days of thelater of acceptance and within validity period of the Tender Bond.

I/We agree to be bound by this tender for a period of ninety (90) days from the date for submission oftenders.

I/We agree to enter into a contract with the Meru County, on the basis of these Bills of Quantities,Conditions of Tendering, Drawings and the Agreement and Conditions of Contract.

I/We agree that until a formal agreement is prepared and executed, this tender, together with yourwritten acceptance hereof, shall constitute a binding contract between us and the Meru County.

v

I/We understand that Meru County is not bound to accept the lowest or any tender and that noexpense incurred by me/us in the preparation of this tender will be allowed.

Name of Tenderer………………………………………………………………………………………..

Address…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

Name of Authorized Representative……………………………………………………………………..

Signature…………………………………………………………………………………………………

Date……………………………………………………………………………………………………...

Occupation……………………………………………………………………………………………….

vi

TENDER BOND

The County SecretaryMeru CountyP O Box 120 - 60200MERU


We ……………………………………………………………………………….. (surety)

Registered in Kenya at the following address ………………………………………………………

……………………………………………………………………… are bound to Meru County for

the payment of Kenya Shillings Two Hundred thousand only (200,000)

The Conditions of this Bond are such that if ………………………………………………………….

………………………………………………………. (Tenderer) keep this tender dated

………………………………………………..valid for fifteen (15) weeks from

…………………………………………………………….and execute the formal Contract Agreement

in accordance with the instructions to tenderers and produce the Performance Bond satisfactorily in

all respects to The Meru County, then the written Bond is to be void otherwise tender bond to be

forfeited.

………………………………………………… …………………………………………

SURETY WITNESS

Address ……………………………………….. Address…………………………………

…………………………………………………. …………………………………………..

Date ……………………………………………. Date …………………………………….

SECTION ONE (1)

INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS

Proposed Governor’s Mansion For Meru County

SECTION 1Instruction to tenderers IT/1

INSTRUCTION TO TENDERERS

The Tenderer is to read carefully the instructions set out below and no claim will be entertained on thegrounds of failure to read or comply with the instructions nor for any alleged mis-understanding oftheir import.

1. Currency

The following Bills of Quantities and Form of Tender are to be priced in Kenya shillings.

2. Tender documents

a) All documents relating to the tender and any correspondence shall be in English language

b) A complete set of the tender documents shall consist of the following; -

i) Instructions to Tenderersii) Form of Tenderiii) Articles of Agreement and Conditions of Contractiv) Bills of Quantitiesv) Contract Drawings – listed in the Appendixvi) Any other materials required to be completed and submitted

c) A complete set of tender documents may be examined by appointment during normal workinghours throughout the tender period at the offices of the Architects/Engineer/QS.

d) It is the Tenderer’s responsibility to examine carefully the whole of the tender documents andto satisfy himself that the documents are complete and NO claim whatsoever will beentertained on the grounds that the Tenderer failed to see any of the documents.

e) Any Tenderer requiring any clarification of tender documents may notify the Employer inwriting. The Employer, will only respond to requests for clarifications received earlier thanseven (7) days prior to deadline for submission of tenders. Copies of any Employersclarification shall be sent to all Tenderers.

3 Information and Documents to be submitted by Tenderers

If required during examination and evaluation of tenders, the tenderer shall submit thefollowing information and documents to the Architect:-

a) Copies of documents defining the legal status, place of registration and principal place ofbusiness.

b) Statement of experience in works of similar nature and size undertaken in the last five yearslisting and giving name of project, value of project and Client.

c) A listing of projects currently committed to stating the value and Client.



d) Listing of major items of Construction Plant and Equipment proposed to be used to under takethe project

e) Listing of key management and Technical personnel proposed for project stating theirqualification and experience and an undertaking they will be available

f) Reports on the financial standing of the tenderer.

g) Evidence of adequacy of working capital for this contract stating cash in hand and lines ofcredit with supporting documents

4 Tender Information

a) It is the Tenderer’s responsibility to obtain all the information he requires to arrive at his tenderprice and no claim for alteration of the tender amount will be entertained on the grounds offailure to obtain accurate information or of any alleged misinterpretation, misinformation orany verbal or written instruction or promise given by the employer or his representative otherthan what is allowed for in the tender documents.

b) Should there be any doubt or obscurity as to the meaning of any of the tender document, or asto anything to be done or not to be done by the Contractor, or as to these instructions, or as toany other matter or things pertaining to the Contract, the Tenderer must submit such doubt orobscurity in writing to the office of the project Architects not later than one week before thedate fixed for delivery of the tender to facilitate the issue of a circular letter to all tenderersclarifying or amending any item.

c) Same as above, no alterations whatsoever may be made in any of the tender documents. If anysuch alterations are made or if the Bills of Quantities and/ or Details of Tender are incompleteor improperly filled in, the tender may be invalidated. The tenderer should also confirm withthe Architect any specifications that he may deem not clear.

d) Before the deadline for submission of tenders, the Employer may modify the tenderingdocuments by issuing addenda. Any addendum thus issued shall be part of the tenderingdocuments and shall be communicated in writing or by email to all tenderers. Prospectivetenderers shall acknowledge receipt of each addendum in writing to the Quantity Surveyor.

5 Pricing

The rates and prices set down by the Tenderer against the items in the Bills of Quantities are tobe the full inclusive value of the finished work described there under and are to include forprofit and all obligations and liabilities of every kind which under the contract are to be borneby the contractor. The Tenderer’s attention is drawn to the section in which provision is madefor the pricing of the Contractor’s general obligations. Any item or items not priced either inthis section or elsewhere in the Bills of Quantities will be deemed to have been allowed for inthe prices inserted against other items in the Bills of Quantities. The tenderer shall fill rates forall items of the works described in the Bills of Quantities. The rates inserted against item shallbe deemed to include all costs involved in complying with specifications requirements.



6. Assignment and Sub-letting

The Tenderer’s attention is drawn to the clauses in the Conditions of Contract which prohibitsthe assignment or sub-letting of the whole or any portion of the Work without the prior consentin writing of the Employer or their representative.

The tenderer shall submit with his tender a list of all portions of the work he proposes to sub-let, with particulars ( as far as possible) of the sub-contractors he proposes to employ, but theacceptance of his tender shall not be regarded as implying in an way approval of his proposalfor sub-letting.

7. Canvassing

Any form of canvassing is strictly prohibited. If a Tenderer makes any representation intendedto influence the consideration of the tenders either directly or indirectly to any person officiallyconcerned in the condition of the tender, his tender shall be disqualified.

8 Form of Tender

a) The tender must be submitted on the form of Tender provided. The tender amount is to beinserted in words and figures in the space provided and all other black spaces elsewhere in theform of tender must be filled in with the information required.

b) The Tenderer is asked to state the time he requires to complete the Contract and he must insertin words and number of weeks or months he requires. The time stated will be taken intoaccount when deciding on the award of the Contract and will be incorporated in the Contractdocuments.

c) The tender must be signed by the principal of the firm or by a person authorized for thepurpose and the registered name and address of the Contractor must be printed in block lettersor typed in space provided. No tender that is incompletely or improperly filled in will beconsidered.

9. Conditions of labour

The Tenderer’s attention is drawn to the requirement in the conditions of Contract to complywith all regulations, rules or instructions concerning conditions and terms or employment ofany class of employee.

10. List of PC items for which the Contractor desires to Tender

If the Tenderer in the ordinary accurse of his business, undertakes work for which prime costor provisional sums are included in the contract and he desires to tender for the same he mustsubmit with his tender list of such items for which he desires to tender.

11. Tender Submission

a) Tenders must be delivered in a plain envelope, properly sealed and with no externalinstructions or mark of identification other than the following title;

“TENDER FOR THE PROPOSED GOVERNOR’S MANSION FOR MERU COUNTY’’



b) Tenders shall be delivered to the Employer at the address specified not later than date specifiedin the invitation letter. Any tender received after the deadline specified shall be rejected.

c) The envelope shall contain all other tender documents supplied to the Tenderers except for anydrawings which are to be returned to the office from which they were issued.

d) Tenders delivered after the time stated will not be considered.

e) The date, place and time of submission shall be indicated in the letter of invitation to tender

12. Validity of Tender

The tender shall remain a valid offer open for acceptance at any time up to Sixty (60) daysfrom the date of submission unless previously withdrawn in writing by a letter to theEmployer.

13. The Employer accepts no Obligations

a) The Employer will not reimburse a Tenderer for any costs incurred in the preparation of thetender.

b) The Employer does not bind himself to accept the lowest or any tender and will not assign anyreason for the rejection of any tender.

14. Visit the Site

The tenderer is strongly advised to visit the site to view and ascertain for himself the siteconditions especially with regard to the existing structures adjacent properties, access to thesite, the site levels and the general neighborhood.

15. Tender opening and evaluation

(a) Tenders will be opened by the Employer in the presence of tenderers who wish to attend. Thetender sum from each tenderer shall be recorded at the tender opening.

b) To assist examination evaluation and comparison of tenders the Employer at his discretionmay ask any tenderer for clarification of tender including breakdown of unit rates.

c) Information relating to the examination and evaluation of tenders and recommendations shallnot be disclosed to tenderers

16. Correction of Errors

Arithmetic errors will be corrected as follows:

(a) where there is a discrepancy between the amount in figures and the amount inwords, the amount in words will prevail; and



(b) where there is a discrepancy between the unit rate and the line item totalresulting from multiplying the unit rate by the quantity, the unit rate as quotedwill prevail, unless there is an obvious typographical error, in which case theadjustment will be made to the entry containing that error.

(c) In the event of a discrepancy between the tender amount as stated in the Form ofTender and the corrected tender figure in the main summary of the Bill ofQuantities, the amount as stated in the Form of Tender shall prevail.

(d) The Error Correction Factor shall be computed by expressing the differencebetween the tender amount and the corrected tender sum as a percentage of thecorrected Builder’s Work (i.e. Corrected tender sum less P.C. and ProvisionalSums)

(e) The Error Correction Factor shall be applied to all Builder’s Work (as a rebateor addition as the case may be) for the purposes of valuations for InterimCertificates and valuation of variations.

17. Award of Contract

(a) The Employer will award the Contract to the tenderer whose tender has beenconsidered to be substantially responsive.

(b) The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any tender and to cancel thetender process and reject all tenders any time, prior to award of contract withoutthereby incurring liability.

(c) The tenderer whose tender has been accepted will be notified of the award inwriting through a “Letter of Acceptance.”

18. Tender submission, Evaluation and Award to be confidential

The whole process of tender submission, query clarification, evaluation, examinationaward etc. shall be confidential

Proposed Governor’s Mansion, Meru County

Constingconsult LtdConsulting Quantity Surveyors and Project Managers

PRE/POST QUALIFICATIONS

i) Tender Questionnaire TQ/1

ii) Qualification Information QI – QI-4

iii) Confidential Business Questionnaire BQ/1 – BQ2

iv) Form of Tender Security TS/1 – TS/2

v) Performance Bank Guarantee PBG/1 – PBG/2


TQ/ 1Constingconsult Ltd

Consulting Quantity Surveyors and Project Managers

TENDER QUESTIONNAIRE

Please fill in block letters.

1. Full names of tenderer; …………………………………………………………

……………………………………………………………………………………...

2. Full address of tenderer to which tender correspondence is to be sent (unlessan agent has been appointed below);……………………………………………………………………………………...

……………………………………………………………………………….……..

3. Telephone number (s) of tenderer; …………………………………………….

……………………………………………………………………………………...

4. Telex of tenderer; ………………………………………………………..………

……………………………………………………………………………………...

5. Name of tenderer’s representative to be contacted on matters of the tenderduring the tender period; ………………………………………………………..

……………………………………………………………………………………...

6. Details of tenderer’s nominated agent (if any) to receive tender notices. Thisis essential if the tenderer does not have his registered address in Kenya(name, address, telephone, telex); …………………..……………………….…

…………………………………………………………………………………..…...

…………………………………………………………………………….…………

_______________________Signature of Tenderer

Make copy and deliver to:THE COUNTY SECRETARYMERU COUNTYP. O. Box 120 - 60200MERU


QI/1Constingconsult Ltd


QUALIFICATION INFORMATION

IMPORTANT NOTES

1. Tenderers are advised to refer to the instructions to tenderers section beforepreparing the qualification information.

2. The tables appearing below are samples. Tenderer should prepare their owntable using a word processor (computer) and fill in all the required information.Hand filled forms will not be accepted.

3. “Certified copies” means certified by a High Court Advocate and Commissionerfor Oaths.

4. Tenderers must be registered companies incorporated in Kenya under thecompanies act CAP 486.

1. Individual Tenderers or Individual Members of Joint Ventures

1.1 Constitution or legal status of tenderer (attach copies or IncorporationCertificate, PIN and VAT certificates);

Place of registration: ____________________________________

Principal place of business _______________________________

Power of attorney of signatory of tender ____________________

1.2 Total annual volume of construction work performed in the last five years

Year VolumeCurrency Value

1.3 Work performed as Main Contractor on works of a similar nature and volumeover the last five years. Also list details of ongoing projects, includingexpected completion date.

Project Name Name of clientand contact of

person

Type of work Value

Note: Tenderer to attach certified copies of completion certificates(completed projects) and award letters (ongoing projects). Refer to clause 1.7(b) of instructions to tenderers.




1.4 For the projects given in 1.3 above give further information as follows:-

Project Name LeadConsultant

Initial contractperiod (weeks)

Actual Completiontime (weeks)

1.5 For the projects given in 1.3 above give further information as follows:-

Project Name Initial ContractSum (Kshs.)

Final AccountSum (Kshs.)

Variations Value

1.6 Major items of Contractor’s Equipment proposed for carrying out the Works.List all information requested below. Refer also to Clause 1.7 (c) of theInstructions to Tenderers.

Item ofEquipment

Description,Make and age

(years)

Condition(new,good, poor) and

numberavailable

State whetherowned or

leased

Note: For owned equipment attach certified copies of proof of ownership e.g.logbooks. For leased, attach copies of lease agreements.

1.7 Qualifications and experience of key personnel proposed for administrationand execution of the Contract. Attach Curriculum Vitaes (CV’s). Refer also toclause 1.5 (e) of the Instructions to Tenderers and Clause 9.1 of theConditions of Contract.

Position Name Qualifications Years ofexperience in

proposed position




1.8 Proposed subcontracts and firms involved. Refer to Clause 7.1 of theConditions of Contract.

Sections of theWorks

Value of Sub-contract

Subcontractor(name andaddress)

Years ofexperience inSimilar work

Note: Subcontractors must be class E or above (Ministry of Public Works)and registered with other relevant Government ministries and publicauthorities. Attach certified copies of certificates.

1.9 Financial reports for the last five years: balance sheets, profit and lossstatements, auditor’s reports, etc. List below and attach copies.____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Note: Audited accounts must be signed and stamped by at least 2 companydirectors and audited by a registered certified accountant.

1.10 Evidence of access to financial resources to meet the qualificationrequirements: cash in hand, lines of credit, etc. List below and attach certifiedcopies of supportive documents. All documents must be signed and stampedby the directors of the institutions providing the financial facilities____________________________________________________________

1.11 Name, address and telephone, email and facsimile numbers of banks thatmay provide reference if contacted by the Employer.____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1.12 Statement of compliance with the requirements of Clause 1.2 of theInstructions to Tenderers.________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

1.13 Proposed program (work method and schedule) in compliance withrequirements Tender Documents

1.14 Bank Statements. Provide certified copies of bank statements from yourofficial bankers for the last 6 months.

1.15 Tax compliance certificate. Provide certified copy of your up to date valid taxcompliance certificate from Kenya Revenue authority.




1.16 NHIF & NSSF compliance certificates. Provide certified copies of your up todate valid remittance receipts, or compliance certificate from NHIF and NSSF.

1.17 Litigation: List of disputes

Name ofContract

Type ofresolution

method

Date ofdispute

Date ofsettlement

Amount indispute

1.18 Details of company ownership; provide copies of the following:- Memorandum of Association Articles of Association List of Directors and their Curriculum Vitaes (CVs)

1.19 Attach copy of current business permit

1.20 Attach copies of Ministry of Public Works registration certificate and anyothers from different registration authorities and government ministries andinstitutions.

2 Joint Ventures

2.1 The information listed in 1.1 – 1.10 above shall be provided for each partnerof the joint venture.

2.2 The information required in 1.11 above shall be provided for the joint venture.

2.3 Attach the power of attorney of the signatory(ies) of the tender authorizingsignature of the tender on behalf of the joint venture

2.4 Attach the Agreement among all partners of the joint venture (and which islegally binding on all partners), which shows that:

a) all partners shall be jointly and severally liable for the execution of theContract in accordance with the Contract terms;

b) one of the partners will be nominated as being in charge, authorized toincur liabilities and receive instructions for and on behalf of any and allpartners of the joint venture; and

c) the execution of the entire Contract, including payment, shall be doneexclusively with the partner in charge.


BQ/1Constingconsult Ltd


CONFIDENTIAL BUSINESS QUESTIONNAIRE

Note: Tenderers must be registered companies incorporated in Kenya under thecompanies Act CAP 486.

You are requested to give the particulars indicated in Part 1 and either Part 2 (a), 2(b) or 2 (b) OR 2 (c) and 2 (d) whichever applies to your type of business.

You are advised that it is a serious offence to give false information on this Form.

Part 1 – General

Business Name ………………………………………………………………………

Location of business premises; Country/Town…………………………..….

Plot No……………………………………… Street/Road ……………………….…

Postal Address……………………………… Tel No………………………………..

Nature of Business……………………………………………………………..……..

Current Trade License No…………………… Expiring date ……………………

Maximum value of business which you can handle at any time: K. pound ……..

Name of your bankers……………………………………………….………………

Branch…………………………………………………………………………………

Part 2 (a) – Sole Proprietor

Your name in full…………………………………… Age…………………………

Nationality………………………………… Country of Origin…………….………

Citizenship details …………………………………………………………………


BQ/2Constingconsult Ltd


Part 2 (b) – Partnership

Give details of partners as follows:

Name in full Nationality CitizenshipDetails

Shares

1.2.3.4.5.

Part 2 (c) - Registered Company

Private or public ……………………………………………………………………………

State the nominal and issued capital of the company

Nominal K£ …………………………………………..

Issued K£ …………………………………………….

Give details of all directors as follows:-

Name in full Nationality CitizenshipDetails

Shares

1.2.3.4.5.

Part 2 (d) – Interest in the Firm:

Is there any person / persons in ----------------- Kenya in general who has interest inthis firm? Yes / No ………………………………….. (Delete as necessary).

I certify that the above information is correct.

…………………………….. ……………………………… ……………………………..(Title) (Signature) (Date)

* Attach proof of citizenship


TS/1Constingconsult Ltd


FORM OF TENDER SECURITY(From an approved Commercial Bank)

BANK GUARANTEE: (See Clause 3.7 of Instructions to Tenderers)

The County SecretaryMeru CountyP. O. Box 120 - 60200MERU

THE PROPOSED GOVERNOR’S MANSION FOR THE MERU COUNTY ATMERU

WHEREAS …………………………………………………………………………..………..(hereinafter called “the Tenderer”) has submitted his tender dated …………………for the construction of THE PROPOSED GOVERNOR’S MANSION FOR THEMERU COUNTY AT MERU

KNOW ALL PEOPLE by these presents that WE ………………………...………………having our registered office at …………………………………………… (hereinaftercalled “the Bank”), are bound unto The County Secretary, Meru County P. O. Box120 - 60200 Meru (hereinafter called “the Employer”) in the sum of Kshs. ---------------------------------------- for which payment well and truly to be made to the saidEmployer, the Bank binds itself, its successors and assigns by these presents,sealed with the Common Seal of the said Bank this ………………….……. Day of……………….………… 20 ……………………

THE CONDITIONS of this obligation are:

1. If after tender opening the Tenderer withdraws his tender during the period oftender validity specified in the instructions to tenderersOr

2. If the Tenderer, having been notified of the acceptance of his tender by theEmployer during the period of tender validity:

(a) fails or refuses to execute the form of Agreement in accordance withthe Instructions to Tenderers, if required; or

(b) fails or refuses to furnish the Performance Security, in accordance withthe Instructions to Tenderers;

We undertake to pay to the Employer up to the above amount upon receipt ofhis first written demand, without the Employer having to substantiate hisdemand, provided that in his demand the Employer will note that the amountclaimed by him is due to him, owing to the occurrence of one or both of thetwo conditions, specifying the occurred condition or conditions.


TS/2Constingconsult Ltd


This guarantee will remain in force up to and including thirty (30) days afterthe period of tender validity, and any demand in respect thereof should reachthe Bank not later than the said date.

_____________________________ ___________________________

[Date] [Signature of the Bank]

_____________________________ _____________________________

[Witness] [Seal]


PBG/1Consting-Consult


PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE

The County SecretaryMeru CountyP. O. Box 120 - 60200MERU

Dear Sir,

WHEREAS _____________________________ (hereinafter called the Contractor) hasundertaken, in pursuance of Contract No. ______________ dated _____________ toexecute THE PROPOSED GOVERNOR’S MANSION FOR THE MERU COUNTY ATMERU (hereinafter called the works);

AND WHEREAS it has been stipulated by you in the said Contract that the Contractor shallfurnish you with a Bank Guarantee by a recognized bank for the sum specified therein assecurity for compliance with his obligations in accordance with the Contract;

AND WHEREAS we have agreed to give the Contractor such a Bank Guarantee:

NOW THEREFORE we hereby affirm that we are the Guarantor and responsible to you, onbehalf of the Contractor, up to a total of Kshs. _____________________________ (amountof Guarantee in figures)

Kenya shillings _____________________________________________________ (amountof Guarantee in words),

and we undertake to pay you, upon your first written demand and without cavil or argument,any sum or sums within the limits of Kenya shillings________________________________________________________________( amount ofGuarantee in words)as aforesaid without your needing to prove or to show grounds or reasons for your demandfor the sum specified therein.

We hereby waive the necessity of your demanding the said debt from the Contractor beforepresenting us with the demand.

We further agree that no change, addition or other modification of the terms of the Contractor of the works to be performed there under or of any of the Contract documents which maybe made between you and the Contractor shall in any way release us from liability underthis Guarantee, and we hereby waive notice of any change, additions, or modification.


PBG/2Consting-Consult


This guarantee shall be valid until the date of issue of the Certificate of Completion.

SIGNATURE AND SEAL OF THE GUARANTOR

_____________________________ __________________________

Name of Bank __________________________________________________________

Address _______________________________________________________________

Date___________________________________________________________________


CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

Table of Contents1 Definitions ………………………………………………… 3-5

2 Interpretation……………………………………………… 5 -6

3 Language and Law ………………………………………… 6

4 Project Manager’s Decisions……………………………… 6

5 Delegation………………………………………………… 6

6 Communications ………………………………………… 6

7 Sub Contracting ………………………………………… 6

8 Other Contractors ……………………………………… 6

9 Personnel ………………………………………………… 6-7

10 Works……………………………………………………… 7

11 Safety and temporary works ……………………………… 7

12 Discoveries ………………………………………………… 7

13 Work Programme ………………………………………… 7 - 8

14 Possession of site ………………………………………… 8

15 Access to site …………………………………………… 8

16 Instructions ……………………………………………… 8

17 Extension or Acceleration of completion date ………… 8-9

18 Management Meetings ………………………………… 9

19 Early Warning …………………………………………… 9

20 Defects …………………………………………………… 9 -10

21 Bills of Quantities ………………………………………… 10

22 Variations ………………………………………………… 10-11

23 Payment certificates, currency of payments and

Advance Payments ……………………………………… 11-13

24 Compensation events …………………………………… 13 - 15

25 Price Adjustment ………………………………………… 15 - 16

26 Retention ………………………………………………… 16

27 Liquidated Damages……………………………………… 16-17


SECTION 2 CC/2Conditions of Contract

28 Securities ………………………………………………… 17

29 Day Works ……………………………………………… 17

30 Liability and Insurance …………………………………… 17 - 19

31 Completion and taking over ……………………………… 19

32 Final Account …………………………………………… 19

33 Termination ……………………………………………… 19 - 20

34 Payment upon termination ………………………………… 20-21

35 Release from performance ………………………………… 21

36 Corrupt gifts and payments of commission ………………21 -22

37 Settlement of Disputes ……………………………………… 22-23



CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

1. Definitions

1.1 In this Contract, except where context otherwise requires, the following termsshall be interpreted as indicated;

“Bill of Quantities” means the priced and completed Bill of Quantitiesforming part of the tender.

“Compensation Events” are those defined in Clause 24 hereunder.

“The Completion Date” means the date of completion of the Works ascertified by the Project Manager, in accordance with Clause 31.

“The Contract” means the agreement entered into between the Employer andthe Contractor as recorded in the Agreement Form and signed by the partiesincluding all attachments and appendices thereto and all documentsincorporated by reference therein to execute, complete, and maintain theWorks,

“The Contractor” refers to the person or corporate body whose tender tocarry out the Works has been accepted by the Employer.

“The Contractor’s Tender” is the completed tendering document submittedby the Contractor to the Employer.

“The Contract Price” is the price stated in the Letter of Acceptance andthereafter as adjusted in accordance with the provisions of the Contract.

“Days” are calendar days; “Months” are calendar months.

“A Defect” is any part of the Works not completed in accordance with theContract.

“The Defects Liability Certificate” is the certificate issued by ProjectManager upon correction of defects by the Contractor.

“The Defects Liability Period” is the period named in the Contract Data andcalculated from the Completion Date.

“Drawings” include calculations and other information provided or approvedby the Project Manager for the execution of the Contract.



“Dayworks” are Work inputs subject to payment on a time basis for labourand the associated materials and plant.

“Employer”, or the “Procuring entity” as defined in the Public ProcurementRegulations (i.e. National or County Government administration, Universities,Public Institutions and Corporations, etc) is the party who employs theContractor to carry out the Works.

“Equipment” is the Contractor’s machinery and vehicles brought temporarilyto the Site for the execution of the Works.

“The Intended Completion Date” is the date on which it is intended that theContractor shall complete the Works. The Intended Completion Date may berevised only by the Project Manager by issuing an extension of time or anacceleration order.

“Materials” are all supplies, including consumables, used by the Contractorfor incorporation in the Works.

“Plant” is any integral part of the Works that shall have a mechanical,electrical, chemical, or biological function.

“Project Manager” is the person named in the Appendix to Conditions ofContract (or any other competent person appointed by the Employer andnotified to the Contractor, to act in replacement of the Project Manager) who isresponsible for supervising the execution of the Works and administering theContract and shall be an “Architect” or a “Quantity Surveyor” registered underthe Architects and Quantity Surveyors Act Cap 525 or an “Engineer”registered under Engineers Registration Act Cap 530.

“Site” is the area defined as such in the Appendix to Condition of Contract.

“Site Investigation Reports” are those reports that may be included in thetendering documents which are factual and interpretative about the surfaceand subsurface conditions at the Site.

“Specifications” means the Specifications of the Works included in theContract and any modification or addition made or approved by the ProjectManager.

“Start Date” is the latest date when the Contractor shall commence executionof the Works. It does not necessarily coincide with the Site possession date(s).



“A Subcontractor” is a person or corporate body who has a Contract with theContractor to carry out a part of the Work in the Contract, which includesWork on the Site.

“Temporary works” are works designed, constructed, installed, and removedby the Contractor which are needed for construction or installation of theWorks.

“A Variation” is an instruction given by the Project Manager which varies theWorks.

“The Works” are what the Contract requires the Contractor to construct, install,and turnover to the Employer, as defined in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract.

2. Interpretation

2.1 In interpreting these Conditions of Contract, singular also means plural, malealso means female or neuter, and the other way around. Headings have nosignificance. Words have their normal meaning in English Language unlessspecifically defined. The Project Manager will provide instructions clarifyingqueries about these Conditions of Contract.

2.2 If sectional completion is specified in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract,reference in the Conditions of Contract to the Works, the Completion Date andthe Intended Completion Date apply to any section of the Works (other thanreferences to the Intended Completion Date for the whole of the Works).

2.3 The following documents shall constitute the Contract documents and shall beinterpreted in the following order of priority;

(1) Agreement,

(2) Letter of Acceptance,

(3) Contractor’s Tender,

(4) Appendix to Conditions of Contract,

(5) Conditions of Contract,

(6) Specifications,

(7) Drawings,

(8) Bill of Quantities,



(9) Any other documents listed in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract asforming part of the Contract.

Immediately after the execution of the Contract, the Project Managershall furnish both the Employer and the Contractor with two copieseach of all the Contract documents. Further, as and when necessary

the Project Manager shall furnish the Contractor [always with a copyto the Employer] with three [3] copies of such further drawings ordetails or descriptive schedules as are reasonably necessary eitherto explain or amplify the Contract drawings or to enable theContractor to carry out and complete the Works in accordance withthese Conditions.

3. Language and Law

3.1 Language of the Contract and the law governing the Contract shall be Englishlanguage and the Laws of Kenya respectively unless otherwise stated.

4 Project Manager’s Decisions

4.1 Except where otherwise specifically stated, the Project Manager will decidecontractual matters between the Employer and the Contractor in the rolerepresenting the Employer.

5 Delegation

5.1 The Project Manager may delegate any of his duties and responsibilities toothers after notifying the Contractor.

6 Communications

6.1 Communication between parties shall be effective only when in writing. Anotice shall be effective only when it is delivered.

7 Subcontracting

7.1 The Contractor may subcontract with the approval of the Project Manager, butmay not assign the Contract without the approval of the Employer in writing.Subcontracting shall not alter the Contractor’s obligations.

8 Other Contractors

8.1 The Contractor shall cooperate and share the Site with other contractors,public authorities, utilities etc. as listed in the Appendix to Conditions ofContract and also with the Employer, as per the directions of the ProjectManager. The Contractor shall also provide facilities and services for them.



The Employer may modify the said List of Other Contractors etc., and shallnotify the Contractor of any such modification.

9 Personnel

9.1 The Contractor shall employ the key personnel named in the QualificationInformation, to carry out the functions stated in the said Information or otherpersonnel approved by the Project Manager. The Project Manager will approveany proposed replacement of key personnel only if their relevant qualificationsand abilities are substantially equal to or better than those of the personnellisted in the Qualification Information. If the Project Manager asks theContractor to remove a person who is a member of the Contractor’s staff orwork force, stating the reasons, the Contractor shall ensure that the personleaves the Site within seven days and has no further connection with the Workin the Contract.

10 Works

10.1 The Contractor shall construct and install the Works in accordance with theSpecifications and Drawings. The Works may commence on the Start Dateand shall be carried out in accordance with the Program submitted by theContractor, as updated with the approval of the Project Manager, andcomplete them by the Intended Completion Date.

11 Safety and Temporary Works

11.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of temporary works.However before erecting the same, he shall submit his designs includingspecifications and drawings to the Project Manager and to any other relevantthird parties for their approval. No erection of temporary works shall be doneuntil such approvals are obtained.

11.2 The Project Manager’s approval shall not alter the Contractor’s responsibilityfor design of the Temporary works and all drawings prepared by theContractor for the execution of the temporary or permanent Works, shall besubject to prior approval by the Project Manager before they can be used.

11.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all activities on the Site.

12. Discoveries

12.1 Anything of historical or other interest or of significant value unexpectedlydiscovered on Site shall be the property of the Employer. The Contractor shallnotify the Project Manager of such discoveries and carry out the ProjectManager’s instructions for dealing with them.



13. Work Program

13.1 Within the time stated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract, theContractor shall submit to the Project Manager for approval a programshowing the general methods, arrangements, order, and timing for all theactivities in the Works. An update of the program shall be a program showingthe actual progress achieved on each activity and the effect of the progressachieved on the timing of the remaining Work, including any changes to thesequence of the activities.

The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for approval an updatedprogram at intervals no longer than the period stated in the Appendix toConditions of Contract. If the Contractor does not submit an updatedprogram within this period, the Project Manager may withhold the amountstated in the said Appendix from the next payment certificate and continue towithhold this amount until the next payment after the date on which theoverdue program has been submitted. The Project Manager’s approval of theprogram shall not alter the Contractor’s obligations. The Contractor mayrevise the program and submit it to the Project Manager again at any time. Arevised program shall show the effect of Variations and Compensation Events.

14. Possession of Site

14.1 The Employer shall give possession of all parts of the Site to the Contractor. Ifpossession of a part is not given by the date stated in the Appendix toConditions of Contract , the Employer will be deemed to have delayed the startof the relevant activities, and this will be a Compensation Event.

15. Access to Site

15.1 The Contractor shall allow the Project Manager and any other personauthorized by the Project Manager, access to the Site and to any place wherework in connection with the Contract is being carried out or is intended to becarried out.

16. Instructions

16.1 The Contractor shall carry out all instructions of the Project Manager whichare in accordance with the Contract.

17. Extension or Acceleration of Completion Date

17.1 The Project Manager shall extend the Intended Completion Date if aCompensation Event occurs or a variation is issued which makes it impossiblefor completion to be achieved by the Intended Completion Date without theContractor taking steps to accelerate the remaining Work, which would cause



the Contractor to incur additional cost. The Project Manager shall decidewhether and by how much to extend the Intended Completion Date within 21days of the Contractor asking the Project Manager in writing for a decisionupon the effect of a Compensation Event or variation and submitting fullsupporting information. If the Contractor has failed to give early warning of adelay or has failed to cooperate in dealing with a delay, the delay caused bysuch failure shall not be considered in assessing the new (extended)Completion Date.

17.2 No bonus for early completion of the Works shall be paid to the Contractor bythe Employer.

18. Management Meetings

18.1 A Contract management meeting shall be held monthly and attended by theProject Manager and the Contractor. Its business shall be to review the plansfor the remaining Work and to deal with matters raised in accordance with theearly warning procedure. The Project Manager shall record the minutes ofmanagement meetings and provide copies of the same to those attending themeeting and the Employer. The responsibility of the parties for actions to betaken shall be decided by the Project Manager either at the managementmeeting or after the management meeting and stated in writing to all whoattended the meeting.

19. Early Warning

19.1 The Contractor shall warn the Project Manager at the earliest opportunity ofspecific likely future events or circumstances that may adversely affect thequality of the Work, increase the Contract Price or delay the execution of theWorks. The Project Manager may require the Contractor to provide anestimate of the expected effect of the future event or circumstance on theContract Price and Completion Date. The estimate shall be provided by theContractor as soon as reasonably possible.

19.2 The Contractor shall cooperate with the Project Manager in making andconsidering proposals on how the effect of such an event or circumstance canbe avoided or reduced by anyone involved in the Work and in carrying out anyresulting instructions of the Project Manager.

20. Defects

20.1 The Project Manager shall inspect the Contractor’s work and notify theContractor of any defects that are found. Such inspection shall not affect theContractor’s responsibilities. The Project Manager may instruct theContractor to search for a defect and to uncover and test any Work that theProject Manager considers may have a defect. Should the defect be found, thecost of uncovering and making good shall be borne by the Contractor,



However, if there is no defect found, the cost of uncovering and making goodshall be treated as a variation and added to the Contract Price.

20.2 The Project Manager shall give notice to the Contractor of any defects beforethe end of the Defects Liability Period, which begins at Completion, and isdefined in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract. The Defects Liability Periodshall be extended for as long as defects remain to be corrected.

20.3 Every time notice of a defect is given, the Contractor shall correct the notifieddefect within the length of time specified by the Project Manager’s notice. Ifthe Contractor has not corrected a defect within the time specified in theProject Manager’s notice, the Project Manager will assess the cost of havingthe defect corrected by other parties and such cost shall be treated as avariation and be deducted from the Contract Price.

21. Bills Of Quantities

21.1 The Bills of Quantities shall contain items for the construction, installation,testing and commissioning of the Work to be done by the Contractor. TheContractor will be paid for the quantity of the Work done at the rate in theBills of Quantities for each item.

21.2 If the final quantity of the Work done differs from the quantity in the Bills ofQuantities for the particular item by more than 25 percent and provided thechange exceeds 1 percent of the Initial Contract price, the Project Managershall adjust the rate to allow for the change.

21.3 If requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall provide the ProjectManager with a detailed cost breakdown of any rate in the Bills of Quantities.

22. Variations

22.1 All variations shall be included in updated programs produced by theContractor.

22.2 The Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with a quotation for carryingout the variations when requested to do so. The Project Manager shall assessthe quotation, which shall be given within seven days of the request or withinany longer period as may be stated by the Project Manager and before theVariation is ordered.

22.3 If the work in the variation corresponds with an item description in the Bills ofQuantities and if in the opinion of the Project Manager, the quantity of work isnot above the limit stated in Clause 21.2 or the timing of its execution doesnot cause the cost per unit of quantity to change, the rate in the Bills ofQuantities shall be used to calculate the value of the variation.



If the cost per unit of quantity changes, or if the nature or timing of the workin the variation does not correspond with items in the Bills of Quantities, thequotation by the Contractor shall be in the form of new rates for the relevantitems of Work.

22.4 If the Contractor’s quotation is unreasonable, the Project Manager may orderthe variation and make a change to the Contract price, which shall be basedon the Project Manager’s own forecast of the effects of the variation on theContractor’s costs.

22.5 If the Project Manager decides that the urgency of varying the Work wouldprevent a quotation being given and considered without delaying the Work, noquotation shall be given and the variation shall be treated as a CompensationEvent.

22.6 The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment for costs that couldhave been avoided by giving early warning.

22.7 When the Program is updated, the Contractor shall provide the ProjectManager with an updated cash flow forecast.

23. Payment Certificates, Currency of Payments and Advance Payments

23.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager monthly applications forpayment giving sufficient details of the Work done and materials on Site andthe amounts which the Contractor considers himself to be entitled to. TheProject Manager shall check the monthly application and certify the amount tobe paid to the Contractor within 14 days. The value of Work executed andpayable shall be determined by the Project Manager.

23.2 The value of Work executed shall comprise the value of the quantities of theitems in the Bills of Quantities completed, materials delivered on Site,variations and compensation events. Such materials shall become theproperty of the Employer once the Employer has paid the Contractor for theirvalue . Thereafter, they shall not be removed from Site without the ProjectManager’s instructions except for use upon the Works.

23.3 Payments shall be adjusted for deductions for retention. The Employer shallpay the Contractor the amounts certified by the Project Manager within 30days of the date of issue of each certificate. If the Employer makes a latepayment, the Contractor shall be paid simple interest on the late payment inthe next payment. Interest shall be calculated on the basis of number of daysdelayed at a rate three percentage points above the Central Bank of Kenya’saverage rate for base lending prevailing as of the first day the paymentbecomes overdue.



23.4 If an amount certified is increased in a later certificate or as a result of anaward by an Arbitrator, the Contractor shall be paid interest upon the delayedpayment as set out in this clause. Interest shall be calculated from the date

23.5 upon which the increased amount would have been certified in the absence ofdispute.

23.6 Items of the Works for which no rate or price has been entered in will not bepaid for by the Employer and shall be deemed covered by other rates andprices in the Contract.

23.7 The Contract Price shall be stated in Kenya Shillings. All payments to theContractor shall be made in Kenya Shillings and foreign currency in theproportion indicated in the tender, or agreed prior to the execution of theContract Agreement and indicated therein. The rate of exchange for thecalculation of the amount of foreign currency payment shall be the rate ofexchange indicated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract. If theContractor indicated foreign currencies for payment other than the currenciesof the countries of origin of related goods and services the Employer reservesthe right to pay the equivalent at the time of payment in the currencies of thecountries of such goods and services. The Employer and the Project Managershall be notified promptly by the Contractor of an changes in the expectedforeign currency requirements of the Contractor during the execution of theWorks as indicated in the Schedule of Foreign Currency Requirements and theforeign and local currency portions of the balance of the Contract Price shallthen be amended by agreement between Employer and the Contractor in orderto reflect appropriately such changes.

23.7 In the event that an advance payment is granted, the following shall apply:-

a) On signature of the Contract, the Contractor shall at his request, andwithout furnishing proof of expenditure, be entitled to an advance of10% (ten percent) of the original amount of the Contract. The advanceshall not be subject to retention money.

b) No advance payment may be made before the Contractor has submittedproof of the establishment of deposit or a directlyliable guarantee satisfactory to the Employer in the amount of theadvance payment. The guarantee shall be in the same currency as theadvance.

c) Reimbursement of the lump sum advance shall be made by deductionsfrom the Interim payments and where applicable from the balance owingto the Contractor. Reimbursement shall begin when the amount of thesums due under the Contract reaches 20% of the original amount of the



Contract. It shall have been completed by the time 80% of this amountis reached.

The amount to be repaid by way of successive deductions shall be calculated bymeans of the formula:

R = A(x1 – x11)80 – 20

Where:

R = the amount to be reimbursed

A = the amount of the advance which has been granted

X1 = the amount of proposed cumulative payments as apercentage of the original amount of the Contract. Thisfigure will exceed 20% but not exceed 80%.

X11 = the amount of the previous cumulative payments as apercentage of the original amount of the Contract. Thisfigure will be below 80%but not less than 20%.

d) with each reimbursement the counterpart of the directly liableguarantee may be reduced accordingly.

24. Compensation Events

24.1 The following issues shall constitute Compensation Events:

(a) The Employer does not give access to a part of the Site by the SitePossession Date stated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract.

(b) The Employer modifies the List of Other Contractors, etc., in a way thataffects the Work of the Contractor under the Contract.

(c) The Project Manager orders a delay or does not issue drawings,specifications or instructions required for execution of the Works ontime.

(d) The Project Manager instructs the Contractor to uncover or to carry outadditional tests upon the Work, which is then found to have no defects.

(e) The Project Manager unreasonably does not approve a subcontract to belet.



(f) Ground conditions are substantially more adverse than couldreasonably have been assumed before issuance of the Letter ofAcceptance from the information issued to tenderers (including the Siteinvestigation reports), from information available publicly and from avisual inspection of the Site.

(g) The Project Manager gives an instruction for dealing with an unforeseencondition, caused by the Employer or additional work required for safetyor other reasons.

(h) Other contractors, public authorities, utilities, or the Employer does notwork within the dates and other constraints stated in the Contract, andthey cause delay or extra cost to the Contractor.

(i) The effects on the Contractor of any of the Employer’s risks.

(j) The Project Manager unreasonably delays issuing a Certificate ofCompletion.

(k) Other compensation events described in the Contract or determined bythe Project Manager shall apply.

24.2 If a compensation event would cause additional cost or would prevent theWork being completed before the Intended Completion Date, the ContractPrice shall be increased and/or the Intended Completion Date shall beextended. The Project Manager shall decide whether and by how much theContract Price shall be increased and whether and by how much the IntendedCompletion Date shall be extended.

24.3 As soon as information demonstrating the effect of each compensation eventupon the Contractor’s forecast cost has been provided by the Contractor, itshall be assessed by the Project Manager, and the Contract Price shall beadjusted accordingly. If the Contractor’s forecast is deemed unreasonable, theProject Manager shall adjust the Contract Price based on the ProjectManager’s own forecast. TheProject Manager will assume that the Contractor will react competently andpromptly to the event.

24.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to compensation to the extent that theEmployer’s interests are adversely affected by the Contractor not having givenearly warning or not having co-operated with the Project Manager.

24.5 Prices shall be adjusted for fluctuations in the cost of inputs only if providedfor in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract.



24.6 The Contractor shall give written notice to the Project Manager of his intentionto make a claim within thirty days after the event giving rise to the claim hasfirst arisen. The claim shall be submitted within thirty days thereafter.Provided always that should the event giving rise to the claim of continuingeffect, the Contractor shall submit an interim claim within the said thirty daysand a final claim within thirty days of the end of the event giving rise to theclaim.

25. Price Adjustment

25.1 The Project Manager shall adjust the Contract Price if taxes, duties and otherlevies are changed between the date 30 days before the submission of tendersfor the Contract and the date of Completion. The adjustment shall be thechange in the amount of tax payable by the Contractor.

25.2 The Contract Price shall be deemed to be based on exchange rates current atthe date of tender submission in calculating the cost to the Contractor ofmaterials to be specifically imported (by express provisions in the ContractBills of Quantities or Specifications) for permanent incorporation in the Works.Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, if at any time during the period of theContract exchange rates shall be varied and this shall affect the cost to theContractor of such materials, then the Project Manager shall assess the netdifference in the cost of such materials. Any amount from time to time soassessed shall be added to or deducted from the Contract Price, as the casemay be.

25.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, the Contract Price shall be deemed tohave been calculated in the manner set out below and in sub-clauses 25.4 and25.5 and shall be subject to adjustment in the events specified thereunder;

(i) The prices contained in the Contract Bills of Quantities shall be deemedto be based upon the rates of wages and other emoluments andexpenses as determined by the Joint Building Council of Kenya (J.B.C.)and set out in the schedule of basic rates issued 30 days before the datefor submission of tenders. A copy of the schedule used by theContractor in his pricing shall be attached in the Appendix toConditions of Contract.

(ii) Upon J.B.C. determining that any of the said rates of wages or otheremoluments and expenses are increased or decreased, then theContract Price shall be increased or decreased by the amount assessedby the Project Manager based upon the difference, expressed as apercentage, between the rate set out in the schedule of basic ratesissued 30 days before the date for submission of tenders and the ratepublished by the J.B.C. and applied to the quantum of labour



incorporated within the amount of Work remaining to be executed at thedate of publication of such increase or decrease.

(iii) No adjustment shall be made in respect of changes in the rates of wagesand other emoluments and expenses which occur after the date ofCompletion except during such other period as may be granted as anextension of time under clause 17.0 of these Conditions.

25.4 The prices contained in the Contract Bills of Quantities shall be deemed to bebased upon the basic prices of materials to be permanently incorporated inthe Works as determined by the J.B.C. and set out in the schedule of basicrates issued 30 days before the date for submission of tenders. A copy of theschedule used by the Contractor in his pricing shall be attached in theAppendix to Conditions of Contract.

25.5 Upon the J.B.C. determining that any of the said basic prices are increased ordecreased then the Contract Price shall be increased or decreased by theamount to be assessed by the Project Manager based upon the differencebetween the price set out in the schedule of basic rates issued 30 days beforethe date for submission of tenders and the rate published by the J.B.C. andapplied to the quantum of the relevant materials which have not been takeninto account in arriving at the amount of any interim certificate under clause23 of these Conditions issued before the date of publication of such increaseor decrease.

25.6 No adjustment shall be made in respect of changes in basic prices of materialswhich occur after the date for Completion except during such other period asmay be granted as an extension of time under clause 17.0 of these Conditions.

25.7 The provisions of sub-clause 25.1 to 25.2 herein shall not apply in respect ofany materials included in the schedule of basic rates.

26. Retention

26.1 The Employer shall retain from each payment due to the Contractor theproportion stated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract until Completionof the whole of the Works. On Completion of the whole of the Works, half thetotal amount retained shall be repaid to the Contractor and the remaining halfwhen the Defects Liability Period has passed and the Project Manager hascertified that all defects notified to the Contractor before the end of this periodhave been corrected.



27. Liquidated Damages

27.1 The Contractor shall pay liquidated damages to the Employer at the ratestated in the Appendix to Conditions of Contract for each day that the actual

27.2 Completion Date is later than the Intended Completion Date. The Employermay deduct liquidated damages from payments due to the Contractor.Payment of liquidated damages shall not alter the Contractor’s liabilities.

27.3 If the Intended Completion Date is extended after liquidated damages havebeen paid, the Project Manager shall correct any overpayment of liquidateddamages by the Contractor by adjusting the next payment certificate. TheContractor shall be paid interest on the overpayment, calculated from the dateof payment to the date of repayment, at the rate specified in Clause 23.30

28. Securities

28.1 The Performance Security shall be provided to the Employer no later than thedate specified in the Letter of Acceptance and shall be issued in an amountand form and by a reputable bank acceptable to the Employer, anddenominated in Kenya Shillings. The Performance Security shall be valid untila date 30 days beyond the date of issue of the Certificate of Completion.

29. Dayworks

29.1 If applicable, the Dayworks rates in the Contractor’s tender shall be used forsmall additional amounts of Work only when the Project Manager has givenwritten instructions in advance for additional work to be paid for in that way.

29.2 All work to be paid for as Dayworks shall be recorded by the Contractor onForms approved by the Project Manager. Each completed form shall beverified and signed by the Project Manager within two days of the Work beingdone.

29.3 The Contractor shall be paid for Dayworks subject to obtaining signedDayworks forms.

30. Liability and Insurance

30.1 From the Start Date until the Defects Correction Certificate has been issued,the following are the Employer’s risks:

(a) The risk of personal injury, death or loss of or damage to property(excluding the Works, Plant, Materials and Equipment), which are dueto;



(i) use or occupation of the Site by the Works or for the purpose ofthe Works, which is the unavoidable result of the Works, or

(ii) negligence, breach of statutory duty or interference with any legalright by the Employer or by any person employed by or contractedto him except the Contractor.

(b) The risk of damage to the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment to theextent that it is due to a fault of the Employer or in Employer’s design,or due to war or radioactive contamination directly affecting the placewhere the Works are being executed.

30.2 From the Completion Date until the Defects Correction Certificate has beenissued, the risk of loss of or damage to the Works, Plant, and Materials is theEmployer’s risk except loss or damage due to;

(a) a defect which existed on or before the Completion Date.

(b) an event occurring before the Completion Date, which was not itself theEmployer’s risk

(c) the activities of the Contractor on the Site after the Completion Date.

30.3 From the Start Date until the Defects Correction Certificate has been issued,the risks of personal injury, death and loss of or damage to property(including, without limitation, the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment)which are not Employer’s risk are Contractor’s risks.

The Contractor shall provide, in the joint names of the Employer and theContractor, insurance cover from the Start Date to the end of the DefectsLiability Period, in the amounts stated in the Appendix to Conditions ofContract for the following events;(a) loss of or damage to the Works, Plant, and Materials;(b) loss of or damage to Equipment;(c) loss of or damage to property (except the Works, Plant, Materials, and

Equipment) in connection with the Contract, and(d) personal injury or death.

30.4 Policies and certificates for insurance shall be delivered by the Contractor tothe Project Manager for the Project Manager’s approval before the Start Date.All such insurance shall provide for compensation required to rectify the lossor damage incurred.

30.5 If the Contractor does not provide any of the policies and certificates required,the Employer may effect the insurance which the Contractor should haveprovided and recover the premiums from payments otherwise due to the



Contractor or, if no payment is due, the payment of the premiums shall be adebt due.

30.6 Alterations to the terms of insurance shall not be made without the approvalof the Project Manager. Both parties shall comply with any conditions ofinsurance policies.

31. Completion and taking over

31.1 Upon deciding that the Works are complete, the Contractor shall issue awritten request to the Project Manager to issue a Certificate of Completion ofthe Works. The Employer shall take over the Site and the Works within seven[7] days of the Project Manager issuing a Certificate of Completion.

32. Final Account

32.1 The Contractor shall issue the Project Manager with a detailed account of thetotal amount that the Contractor considers payable to him by the Employerunder the Contract before the end of the Defects Liability Period. The ProjectManager shall issue a Defects Liability Certificate and certify any finalpayment that is due to the Contractor within 30 days of receiving theContractor’s account if it is correct and complete. If it is not, the ProjectManager shall issue within 30 days a schedule that states the scope of thecorrections or additions that are necessary. If the final account is stillunsatisfactory after it has been resubmitted, the Project Manager shall decideon the amount payable to the Contractor and issue a Payment Certificate. TheEmployer shall pay the Contractor the amount due in the Final Certificatewithin 60 days.

33. Termination

33.1 The Employer or the Contractor may terminate the Contract if the other partycauses a fundamental breach of the Contract. These fundamental breaches ofContract shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following;

(a) the Contractor stops work for 30 days when no stoppage of work isshown on the current program and the stoppage has not beenauthorized by the Project Manager;

(b) the Project Manager instructs the Contractor to delay the progress of theWorks, and the instruction is not withdrawn within 30 days;

(c) the Contractor is declared bankrupt or goes into liquidation other thanfor a reconstruction or amalgamation;



(d) a payment certified by the Project Manager is not paid by the Employerto the Contractor within 30 days (for Interim Certificate) or 60 days (forFinal Certificate)of issue.

(e) the Project Manager gives notice that failure to correct a particulardefect is a fundamental breach of Contract and the Contractor fails tocorrect it within a reasonable period of time determined by the ProjectManager;

(f) the Contractor does not maintain a security, which is required.

33.2 When either party to the Contract gives notice of a breach of Contract to theProject Manager for a cause other than those listed under Clause 33.1 above,the Project Manager shall decide whether the breach is fundamental or not.

33.3 Notwithstanding the above, the Employer may terminate the Contract forconvenience.

33.4 If the Contract is terminated, the Contractor shall stop work immediately,make the Site safe and secure, and leave the Site as soon as reasonablypossible.

The Project Manager shall immediately thereafter arrange for a meeting for thepurpose of taking record of the Works executed and materials, goods,equipment and temporary buildings on Site.

34. Payment Upon Termination

34.1 If the Contract is terminated because of a fundamental breach of Contract bythe Contractor, the Project Manager shall issue a certificate for the value of theWork done and materials ordered and delivered to Site up to the date of theissue of the certificate. Additional liquidated damages shall not apply. If thetotal amount due to the Employer exceeds any payment due to the Contractor,the difference shall be a debt payable by the Contractor.

34.2 If the Contract is terminated for the Employer’s convenience or because of afundamental breach of Contract by the Employer, the Project Manager shallissue a certificate for the value of the Work done, materials ordered, thereasonable cost of removal of equipment, repatriation of the Contractor’spersonnel employed solely on theWorks, and the Contractor’s costs of protecting and securing the Works.

34.3 The Employer may employ and pay other persons to carry out and completethe Works and to rectify any defects and may enter upon the Works and useall materials on the Site, plant, equipment and temporary works.



34.4 The Contractor shall, during the execution or after the completion of theWorks under this clause remove from the Site as and when required, withinsuch reasonable time as the Project Manager may in writing specify, anytemporary buildings, plant, machinery, appliances, goods or materialsbelonging to or hired by him, and in default the Employer may (without beingresponsible for any loss or damage) remove and sell any such property of theContractor, holding the proceeds less all costs incurred to the credit of theContractor.Until after completion of the Works under this clause the Employer shall notbe bound by any other provision of this Contract to make any payment to theContractor, but upon such completion as aforesaid and the verification withina reasonable time of the accounts therefore the Project Manager shall certifythe amount of expenses properly incurred by the Employer and, if suchamount added to the money paid to the Contractor before such determinationexceeds the total amount which would have been payable on due completionin accordance with this Contract the difference shall be a debt payable to theEmployer by the Contractor; and if the said amount added to the said moneybe less than the said total amount, the difference shall be a debt payable bythe Employer to the Contractor.

35. Release from Performance

35.1 If the Contract is frustrated by the outbreak of war or by any other evententirely outside the control of either the Employer or the Contractor, theProject Manager shall certify that the Contract has been frustrated. TheContractor shall make the Site safe and stop Work as quickly as possible afterreceiving this certificate and shall be paid for all Work carried out beforereceiving it.

36. Corrupt gifts and payments of commission

The Contractor shall not;

(a) Offer or give or agree to give to any person in the service of the Employer anygift or consideration of any kind as an inducement or reward for doing orforbearing to do or for having done or forborne to do any act in relation to theobtaining or execution of this or any other Contract for the Employer or forshowing or forbearing to show favour or disfavour to any person in relation tothis or any other contract for the Employer.

(b) Enter into this or any other contract with the Employer in connection withwhich commission has been paid or agreed to be paid by him or on his behalf



or to his knowledge, unless before the Contract is made particulars of anysuch commission and of the terms and conditions of any agreement for thepayment thereof have been disclosed in writing to the Employer.Any breach of this Condition by the Contractor or by anyone employed by himor acting on his behalf (whether with or without the knowledge of theContractor) shall be an offence under the provisions of the Public ProcurementRegulations issued under The Exchequer and Audit Act Cap 412 of the Lawsof Kenya.

37. Settlement Of Disputes

37.1 In case any dispute or difference shall arise between the Employer or theProject Manager on his behalf and the Contractor, either during the progressor after the completion or termination of the Works, such dispute shall benotified in writing by either party to the other with a request to submit it toarbitration and to concur in the appointment of an Arbitrator within thirtydays of the notice. The dispute shall be referred to the arbitration and finaldecision of a person to be agreed between the parties. Failing agreement toconcur in the appointment of an Arbitrator, the Arbitrator shall be appointedby the Chairman or Vice Chairman of any of the following professionalinstitutions;

(i) Architectural Association of Kenya

(ii) Institute of Quantity Surveyors of Kenya

(iii) Association of Consulting Engineers of Kenya

(iv) Chartered Institute of Arbitrators (Kenya Branch)

(v) Institution of Engineers of Kenya

On the request of the applying party. The institution written to first by theaggrieved party shall take precedence over all other institutions.

37.2 The arbitration may be on the construction of this Contract or on any matteror thing of whatsoever nature arising thereunder or in connection therewith,including any matter or thing left by this Contract to the discretion of theProject Manager, or the withholding by the Project Manager of any certificateto which the Contractor may claim to be entitled to or the measurement andvaluation referred to in clause 23.0 of these conditions, or the rights andliabilities of the parties subsequent to the termination of Contract.



37.3 Provided that no arbitration proceedings shall be commenced on any disputeor difference where notice of a dispute or difference has not been given by theapplying party within ninety days of the occurrence or discovery of the matteror issue giving rise to the dispute.

37.4 Notwithstanding the issue of a notice as stated above, the arbitration of such adispute or difference shall not commence unless an attempt has in the firstinstance been made by the parties to settle such dispute or differenceamicably with or without the assistance of third parties. Proof of such attemptshall be required.

37.5 Notwithstanding anything stated herein the following matters may be referredto arbitration before the practical completion of the Works or abandonment ofthe Works or termination of the Contract by either party:

37.5.1 The appointment of a replacement Project Manager upon thesaid person ceasing to act.

37.5.2 Whether or not the issue of an instruction by the ProjectManager is empowered by these Conditions.

37.5.3 Whether or not a certificate has been improperly withheldor is not in accordance with these Conditions.

37.5.4 Any dispute or difference arising in respect of war risksor war damage.

37.6 All other matters shall only be referred to arbitration after the completion oralleged completion of the Works or termination or alleged termination of theContract, unless the Employer and the Contractor agree otherwise in writing.

37.7 The Arbitrator shall, without prejudice to the generality of his powers, havepowers to direct such measurements, computations, tests or valuations asmay in his opinion be desirable in order to determine the rights of the partiesand assess and award any sums which ought to have been the subject of orincluded in any certificate.

37.8 The Arbitrator shall, without prejudice to the generality of his powers, havepowers to open up, review and revise any certificate, opinion, decision,requirement or notice and to determine all matters in dispute which shall besubmitted to him in the same manner as if no such certificate, opinion,decision requirement or notice had been given.

37.9 The award of such Arbitrator shall be final and binding upon the parties.


Appendix toConditions of Contract

ACC/1

APPENDIX TO CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

THE EMPLOYER IS

Name: MERU COUNTY

Address: P. O. Box 120 - 60200

Name of Authorized Representative: ____________________________________________

Telephone: _______________________

Facsimile: ________________________

The Project Manager is

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Facsimile: ________________________

The name (and identification number) of the Contract is THE PROPOSED GOVERNOR’SMANSION FOR THE MERU COUNTY AT MERU

Contract Ref: MCG/ONT/002/2014-2015

The Works consist of an Executive Modern Mansion, Services installation and ExternalWorks

The Start Date shall be to be agreed

The Intended Completion Date for the whole of the Works shall be LEFT COMPETITIVEBUT SHALL NOT EXCEED 78 WEEKS. However, the Tenderer is required to determineand state their proposed time.

The following documents also form part of the Contract:_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Appendix toConditions of Contract ACC/2

The Contractor shall submit a revised program for the Works within FOURTEEN (14) daysof delivery of the Letter of Acceptance.

The Site Possession Date shall be AGREED

The Site is located at MERU TOWN IN MERU and is defined in drawingsnos._________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

The Defects Liability period is 180 days.

Other Contractors, utilities etc., to be engaged by the Employer on the SiteInclude those for the execution of;

1.____________________________________________

2.______________________________________________

3._____________________________________________

4._____________________________________________

The minimum insurance covers shall be;

1. The minimum cover for insurance of the Works and of Plant and Materials inrespect of the Contractor’s faulty design is 20% percent of contract sum

2. The minimum cover for loss or damage to Equipment is 10% percent of Contract Sum

3. The minimum for insurance of other property is 10% percent of Contract Sum

4. The minimum cover for personal injury or death insurance

For the Contractor’s employees is 10% of Contract Sum

And for other people is 5% of Contract Sum

The following events shall also be Compensation Events:

1. N/A

2. __________________________________________________________________________

3. __________________________________________________________________________

4. __________________________________________________________________________

Appendix toConditions of Contract ACC/3

The period between Program updates is 30 days.

The amount to be withheld for late submission of an updated Program is 10% of value ofsubsequent certificate

The proportion of payments retained is 10% percent.

The Price Adjustment Clause NOT (shall/shall not) apply

The liquidated damages for the whole of the Works is Kshs. 100,000 (per week or partthereof)

The Performance Security shall be for the following minimum amounts equivalent as apercentage of the Contract Price 10% percent (%)

The Completion Period for the Works is competitive Tenderer to insert [Weeks]

The rate of exchange for calculation of foreign currency payments is N/A.

The schedule of basic rates used in pricing by the Contractor is as attached [Contractor toattach].

Advance Payment shall not be granted.

Specifications 1

SECTION 1 - EXCAVATION AND EARTH WORKS

1. Nature of ExcavationThe contractor must ascertain for himself the nature of the material to be excavated and price the work accordingly.No extra payment will be made beyond the Contract Sum for any alleged ignorance in this respect.

2. Excavation GenerallyIt is the responsibility of the contactor to check the commencing levels and determine depths of excavation as no extrapayment will be made in respect of any alleged excavations carried out due to the commencing levels being abovethat shown upon the drawings without the prior written agreement of the Structural Engineer.

3. Site ClearanceThe Contractors shall clear the construction areas within the site of all bushes, roots, and brush boulders, naturalobstructions rubbish and any other natural or artificial obstructions which would interfere with construction of building,roads, paths and drains.

4. Over-site ExcavationOver-site excavations over the areas of building shall be done up-to and including removal of vegetable soil. Theexcavated material is to be spread around the site as directed.

Excavated material suitable for backfilling around foundations and for making up levels under roads, floors etc, isto be kept separate from soil spoil heaps and to be re-used as directed or spread and leveled on the site at the end ofexcavation operation when found to be surplus. Vegetable soil is not to be used for backfilling around foundations.

5. Excavation for Foundations and StructuresExcavations for foundations and the reinforced concrete structure shall be to the widths, depths and levels toaccommodate the structure shown on the drawings and to the satisfaction of the Structural Engineer. No extra paymentshall be allowed for working space including space for formwork and use of planking and strutting.

6. InspectionWhen the excavations have been made to the sizes and depths required from the drawings, the Structural Engineer

shall be called to the site immediately for inspection, and upon approval, the Contractor shall proceed with the work toprevent any natural ground moisture from drying out and to prevent rain water or other surface water draining into thefoundations. The excavations are to be left open until any variations in depth has been agreed.

7. Excavations below Required Depths.Should any excavations be made below the levels or lines shown on the drawings or otherwise required by the

Structural Engineer, the Contractor must fill up the resultant over- excavation to the proper levels or lines with theconcrete class “E” at his own expenses (see “Concrete Work”).

8. FillingFilling to make up levels under floors shall be approved granular materials arising from excavations which has beencarefully separated from other excavated material for it suitability for the purpose. It shall be entirely free from

organic matter, mud, rubbish or lumps exceeding a size, which will pass through a 100mm-dianeter ring in everydirection. Filling shall be placed in layers not exceeding 150 mm thick and shall be rolled with a pedestrian operatedpower roller of at least 700 kg in weight. The rolling process shall be continued for every layer until no furthernoticeable Consolidation takes palace.

9. Return, fill in and RamReturn fill in and ram suitable filling material as described above, around foundations and other concrete structure inlayers not exceeding 150mm thick and carefully ram and consolidate with power rammer. No filling in shall beexecuted until concrete foundations etc. have been inspected and approved by the Structural Engineer.

Regardless of the means of backfilling and compaction adopted, the Contractor is responsible not only for the standard of thework but also for any possible damage of the permanent work or adjacent structure.

Specifications 2

10. LevelingThe quotation must include for leveling and preparing the ground for concrete or other works including ramming or rollingbottoms of excavations where necessary.

11. Soil SterilizationAnti- termite treatment is to be carried out by an approved specialist firm who is required, upon completion of the

soil sterilization, to furnish a written 10-year guarantee certifying the following:a. That the chemicals applied comply with the requirements specified herein for chemical concentration and rates of

application.b. That the treatment will remain effective against termite infestation for a period of ten years.c. The free treatment by the firm of any areas showing signs of infestation before the expiry of the ten year period.

The chemicals to be used include the following, or any other equal and approved chemical:1. Aldrin 0.5% applied in oil solution or water emulsion.2. Benzene hexachloride, 0.8 of gamma isomer applied in oil solution or water emulsion.3. Chloridane 1.0% applied in solution or water emulsion4. Dieldrin 0.5% applied inoil solution or water emulsion5. Lindane; 0.8% in oil solution or wate emulsion6. Pentachlorophenol; 5% in oil solution.7. Trichlorobenzene; 1 part to 3 parts oil.

Some of the chemicals listed above are toxic to animals and plant life and must, therefore, be applied only with caution byan experienced person. Where individual water supply systems are proposed precautions must be taken to prevent infilteringand endangering the water supply. Treatment shall not be made when soils or fill is excessively wet or immediately afterheavy rain.

Precautions must also be taken to prevent disturbance of the treatment by animals or human contact with the treated soil.The treatment areas are to be covered as quickly as possible after treatment.

The rate of application is to be as indicated by the manufacturer and areas measured include those under floor and aroundwall and column foundations and around the perimeter of the house

12. Disposal of Surplus Excavated MaterialSurplus excavated material will be carted away from the vicinity of the works.

13. Disposal of WaterThe contractor shall keep the excavations free from standing water and silt (or excavated material softenedby water) and he shall include for the cost of pumping, construction of temporary drains, soak-away pits,etc, as deemed necessary to achieve this. If spring or running water is encountered, the cost of any pumpingordered by the Structural Engineer will be paid for by the Contractor.

14. Planking and StruttingSides of all excavations must be supported in order to prevent falls from or collapse of the earth face. Theterm “planking and Strutting” is deemed to include any method which the Contractor elects, but with theprior approval of the Engineer, to adopt to uphold, protect and maintain the sides of excavations. The

Contractor will be responsible for any consequences of his failure in this respect including clearing awayfallen material and any extra concrete or other works including formwork ordered by the Structural engineerdue to such failure.

15. Hard-coreHard-core shall be hard crushed stone to pass a 100mm ring in al directions. No sand, quarry dust or fine

material will be permitted. All hard-core beds shall be topped with a layer of fine stone or aggregateminimum size 12 mm to fill the void on the surface too receive concrete beds. Rates for hard-core shallinclude for leveling or finishing or laying to falls and consolidating by rolling as described for “filling”above.

Specifications 3

16. Classification of materials“Rock” shall mean black trap granite, quartzitic sandstone or other rock of similar hardness which in the StructuralEngineer’s opinion required drilling, wedging and splitting or broken up by means of compressors, jack hammers andchisels, etc.

“Earth” or “Soft rock” shall mean all ground other than that classified as “rock” and shall include made up ground and anyloose stones or pieces of concrete not exceeding 0.10m3 in volume.

Should the contractor consider that any of the excavations are more difficult in nature than excavation in “Earth” he shallimmediately notify the Quantity Surveyor in writing. Failing such notification, the excavations shall be deemed to be in“Earth” shall be measured and valued accordingly.

The Contractor may use any method he chooses to excavate any class of materials, but his chosen method of excavationshall not determine the classification of the excavation.

17. BlastingNO blasting shall be allowed on site. Should blasting become absolutely necessary, the contractor shall take everyprecaution to protect the works and persons and property in the vicinity of works. The contractor shall in suchcircumstances obtain written authority of the Engineer. The Contractor will be held responsible for any injury or damagecaused by any blasting operations and shall make good such damage at his own expense.

Specifications 4

SECTION 2 – CONCRETE WORK

1. Materials and Workmanship Generally

The recommendations of the latest British Standards Code of Practice for the Structural use of Reinforced Concrete inBuilding shall be deemed to be incorporated in these preambles Clauses unless otherwise specifically stated.

2. Materials GenerallyAll materials to be used in the works shall conform as to quality and description as specified hereunder and shall beequal to approved samples. In particular, no materials shall be used until approved samples have been supplied to theConsulting Engineer for approval at least one week before ordering in bulk and delivery to the site. Any materialsdelivered to the site which has not been previously approved by the Structural Engineer shall be the Contractor’sliability. All materials shall be transported, handled and stored on site so as to preclude damage, deterioration orcontamination. All condemned materials are to be removed from the site within 24 hours.

3. Cement

The cement, unless otherwise specified on the drawing shall be ordinary Portland cement of approved manufacture,delivered in the manufacturer’s bags and shall comply in all respects with the requirements of the latest British Standard12. The consignments of the cement shall be delivered in scaled bags and shall be stored on the site so as too be used inthe order in which they are delivered. The Structural Engineer shall have the right to take samples for testing inaccordance with B.S. 12 and the Contractor is to obtain current certificates of tests from the manufacturer prior to bulkdeliveries. Under no circumstances is high Alumina cement too be used.

4. Aggregate Generally

All aggregate shall be from approved, reputable sources and shall be strong, hard, and durable, of limited porosity andfree from dust, soft materials, earth or other extraneous matter, and washed and or screened by the contractor if sorequired by the Structural Engineer. Samples shall be provided as often as called upon by the Structural Engineer forTesting in accordance with BS. 882. Only approved materials shall be used.

Graded samples of all types of aggregate shall, after approval, be kept on site behind glass for visual checking ofsubsequent deliveries for grading, shape and where applicable, colour.

Aggregate shall be stored on site on paved areas with divisions between each type of aggregate, and shall be used in theorder in which they are received on site. No aggregate shall be stored directly on the ground.

5. Fine Aggregates

The Contractor shall ensure that the grading of fine aggregates shall be such that not more than 10% by weight shallexceed 5 mm in size and not that 10% by weight shall pass a sieve BS. No.100. Between these limits the grading shallconform to the grading for either zone 1, 2, or 3 (BS.882).

6. Coarse Aggregate

Course aggregate shall bee clean, well-graded natural gravel or crushed stone from an approved quarry and washed ifrequired by the Structural Engineer. The pieces shall be angular or rounded in shape and shall have granular orcrystalline or smooth (but not Glassy) non-powdery surface. Flaky and laminated pieces, mica and shale shall only bepresent in such quantities as not affect adversely the strength and durability of the concrete.

The four nominal aggregate sizes shall be 40 mm; 20mm; 15mm; 10mm and the grading when analyzed as described inBS.812 shall be within the limits given in BS. 882.

Specifications 5

7. WaterWater used for mixing of concrete, washing out of shuttering and similar purposes shall be clean fresh and free fromorganic impurities in amounts likely to impair the quality of the concrete.

8. Steel ReinforcementSteel for reinforced concrete shall comply with the following specifications:

Mild steel rod reinforcement shall comply with BS.4449

High tensile steel reinforcement shall be either cold worked deformed steel bars of circular octagonal section complyingwith BS.4461 or hot rolled deformed high tensile bars having a guarantee minimum yield stress of 4200 kg/sq.cm andother physical qualities in accordance with BS. 4449. Welded steel fabric reinforcement shall comply with BS. 4483Code of Practice C.P 110, for the structure use of reinforced concrete in buildings.

All steel reinforcement shall be supplied by an approved manufacturer, and the Contractor may be required to obtain amanufacturer’s test certificate in respect of steel reinforcement supplied. In absence of such a certificate, the Contractormay be required to submit samples to be tested at the Contractor’s expense in such manner as the Engineer maydetermine. The steel shall be stored so that it is kept clean and reasonably free from rust.

The placing of all reinforcement shall be checked by the Engineer and in no circumstances is concrete to be depositedaround any steel that has not been passed. At least twenty four hours notice shall be given to the Engineer thatreinforcement will be ready for inspection.

9. Bending and fixing of ReinforcementAll bending, cutting and fixing shall be in compliance with the British Standard Code of Practice. C. P. 110. BendingSchedules are incorporated in the Contract Drawings or shall be obtained on request from the Structural Engineer.

The number, size, form and position of all reinforcements shall, unless otherwise directed or permitted by the Engineer,be strictly in accordance with the drawings. Bars shall be of the required lengths, and lapping, except where indicatedon the Drawing, is not permitted unless approved by the Engineer.

Overall dimensions shall not be exceeded and shall not be less than 6mm below the required dimensions. The sizes oflinks and the likes shall be within tolerance of 3 mm under or over the specified dimensions. Any tolerances in the toplength of the bar as cut shall be taken up in the end hooks or other approved portions of the bar. The internal radius ofthe bends at corners of links and the like shall equal half the diameter of the bar embraced by the link.

At specified locations, as directed by the Engineer, reinforcing bars to be lapped at staggered locations so as not toreduce the effective spacing between bars to less than two times the bar diameter or 5mm plus the maximum size ofcoarse aggregate, as referred in BS 8110.

The steel reinforcement shall be assembled and fixed in the form of a rigid cage. To prevent displacement before orduring concreting the bars shall be secured to each other with approved wire. Concrete distance blocks shall, unlessotherwise directed, be used between the reinforcement and the bottom and sides of the forms to ensure correct concretecover to the bars, as specified on the drawings. The specified cover shall be provided and maintained within thespecified tolerance.

The minimum clear distance between adjacent bars shall be 25 mm horizontally and 25 mm vertically. Spacer bars shallbe inserted at such intervals that the bars do not have perceptible sag.

Great care must be taken to ensure the correct positioning of beam and column starter bars and to secure projecting barsagainst displacement both during and after concreting.

At the time of fixing and when concrete is being placed, all reinforcement shall be free from oil, paint, grease, excessivedust and scale or any other coating, which will destroy its bond with the concrete.

Specifications 6

10. Wrought Form Work

Form work described as wrought shall be constructed of, or lines with, 100mm wide sawn boards well cramped together,boards running horizontally on fascia, down drains, etc. as shown on drawings. Boards on columns to run vertically.An exposed vertical aris to be formed with 20mm x 20mm triangular bead set in corner of formwork

11. Concrete GradesConcrete must comply with the requirements set out in the following table according to the grade:

12. Preliminary Cube TestsThe contractor shall specify the source from which the aggregate will be obtained and shall deliver at his own costsufficient material to enable preliminary cube tests to be carried out and approved by Engineer. The Contractor will beresponsible for submitting his proposals for the concrete mix proportions together with aggregate grade curves to theEngineer for approval and for the payment of the fees of an approved Testing Authority in carrying out the crushingtests. The strength of the preliminary cubes must be a minimum of 33% above those in the table which are the minimumworks strength.

The approval of any mix by the Engineer will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for ensuring that allconcrete used in the works obtain the minimum works strength shown above. In proportioning the concrete and thequantities of fine and coarse aggregate by either volume or weight, due allowance shall be made for the moisture contentof the aggregate.

Only sufficient water shall be added to the cement and aggregate during mixing to produce a concrete having sufficientworkability to enable it to be well consolidated, to be worked into the corners of the shuttering and aroundreinforcement, too give the specified surface finish and to have the specified strength. When a suitable amount of waterhas been determined the resulting consistency shall be maintained throughout the corresponding parts of the work andthe slump test or compaction factor test shall be carried out from time to time to ensure the maintenance of thisconsistency. In no case should the slump be more than 65 mm as determined by the slump test nor should thecompaction factor be more than 0.87 as determined by the standard compaction factor test as described in BS. 1881.

Should the contractor wish to use patent, plasticising compounds or other admixes, those shall be approved by Engineerand be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s publications.

13. Work Cube TestWork cube tests shall be made throughout the Contract. Each cube shall be described with the date of manufacture,location and identification mark. A record shall be kept for each batch of cubes showing the position in the works whichthe concrete represents, the date of manufacture, the mixture and the slump of the concrete, particulars of the cement andaggregates used, a statement of whether or not the cubes were vibrated and other; information relating to the subsequenthistory of the cubes

Gradenominal 1

Mix

Nominalcubic Meter ofAggregate per

1500 kg ofcement

Minimum resistance tocrushing at 7 days after

mixing (works test)Kg/sq/cm

Minimumresistance to

crushing at 28days after mixing

(works test)Kg/sq/cm

Size ofcoarse

aggregatemm

Maximumwater ratioby weight

Fine Course Test Test

A 1:1:2 1 2 210 315 6 0.50

B 1:1:5:3 1.5 3 175 262 20 0.55

C 1:2:4 2 4 140 210 20 0.60

D 1:3:6 3 6 84 140 40 0.60

E 1:4:8 4 8 65 100 40 0.60

Specifications 7

The cubes shall be made, cured and tested in accordance with the requirements of BS. 1881 when directed by theEngineer and in his presence or that of the Approved Testing Authority. A sample of concrete shall be taken at randomon 8 separate occasions during each of the first 5 days of using the mix.

Thereafter at least one sample shall be taken on each day any concrete of that particular mix is used. From each samplefour cubes shall be made, two for testing at 7 days and two for testing at 28 days. The works cube results shall beexamined both individually and in consecutive (but not overlapping) sets of four, for which the average and the range ofeach set are calculated

The mix proportions shall be modified to increase the strength if, in the first and consecuted (but not overlapping) setsany of the following conditions are not satisfied:

Not more than 2 individual results of the 40 cube tests should fall below the specified works cube strength. No value of the range in any set should exceed 4 times the designed standard deviation. No more than one set should have any average which is less than the specified strength plus 11/3 times the

designed standard deviation; No value of the average for any set should be less than the specified strength plus the designed standard

deviation.

After 10 consecutive sets of results have been obtained the overall average and the standard deviation of the 40 resultsshall be calculated and any appropriate modification made.

Subsequently, if any of the foregoing conditions are satisfied, the overall average and the standard deviation of theprevious consecutive 40 results, including the non-complying sets, should be calculated and the appropriate steps takenif the overall average strength minus twice the standard deviation is less than the specified work cube strength.

14. Quality Control Requirements

SupervisionA competent person shall be employed whose duty shall be to supervise all stages in the preparation and placing ofconcrete. He shall supervise all tests on the materials and cubes and the maintenance and calibration of mixing andmeasuring plant. This person shall also be responsible for keeping an accurate record of the dates on which concrete ispoured and where.

Batch and Mixing PlantThe quantities of cement and of fine and coarse aggregates shall be determined by weight. The amount of wateradded shall be measured, allowance being made for the water content of the aggregate. The accuracy of weighing andmeasuring equipment shall be + 2.5.

Measuring equipment for water shall be maintained in a clean serviceable condition.

15. Workmanship

15.1 Placing of Reinforcement

Reinforcement shall be accurately placed and maintained in the position described on the drawings or elsewhere to theentire satisfaction of the Engineer. Bars intended to be in contact at passing point shall be securely wired together with16 gauge annealed soft iron tying wire. Binders and the like shall tightly embrace the bars and any slackness ormisplacement of bars shall be rectified before the Engineer is called for inspection. Spacer of approved design shall beused for ensuring the correct positioning of the bars and diagonal wiring shall be provided to ensure rigidity of allassembled unit of reinforcement. The vertical distance required between successive layers of bars in beam or similarmembers shall be maintained by the provision of mild steel spacer bars inserted at such intervals that the main bars donot perceptibly sag between spacers.The rates for reinforcement must include for all requisite wiring, spacers and precast blocks to maintain the requiredspacing and cover.

Specifications 8

All bars to be bent in accordance with BS. 4466: 1969.

Cover of concrete to the reinforcement shall be, unless shown otherwise:

Columns - 25 mm minimum to main bars

Base - 50 mm minimum

Beams - 25 mm minimum

Slab - 15 mm minimum

Wall - 15 mm minimum

Splices to future work shall be covered in a manner approved by the Engineer to prevent rusting and deterioration.Before any concreting is carried out, the approval of the Engineer as to the correctness of the fixed reinforcement shallbe obtained but such approval shall not remove the responsibility for the correctness of the placing from the Contractor.During concreting a competent steel fixer shall be in attendance on the concrete and to make minor adjustments to theposition of bars should they become displaced.

15.2 Formwork Generally

All form work and moulds shall be rigidly constructed to accurate shape and dimensions as described on the drawings.Timber shall be well seasoned, free from loose knots and be of a kind and thickness that will avoid deflection andwarping, remaining true to line and level. Faces in contact with the concrete shall be free from adhering grout,projecting nails, splits or other defects and shall be coated with an approved mould oil so as to prevent gout adhering tothem, care being taken to prevent such coatings from any contact with the reinforcement

Formwork be braced and strutted to prevent deformation under the weight and pressure of the wet concrete, constructionloads, winds and other forces. The bottom of the beam boxes shall be erected with an upward camber so as to preventdownward deflection. Maximum tolerances, which will be permitted in the finished concrete work, are as follows:

Dimensions less than 3m - +3mm

Dimension between 3m and 15 m - 6mm

Dimensions over 15 m - 10mm

Joints in the moulds of form work be carefully made so as to prevent leakage of cement grout and particular care shall beexercised to this respect for moulds in which it is intended to place vibrated concrete. Openings in the formwork forinspection of the inside and for the escape of water used for washing out accumulated debris shall be formed in such amanner that they can be effectively closed before placing the concrete.

Formwork connections and joints shall be constructed so as to permit easy removal of the form work, but shall be sosecured as to retain correct shape under pressure exerted by the wet concrete during placing, vibration, setting andhardening. If any wire ties passing through the concrete or bolts are used, measures shall be taken to prevent rust stainson the finished work and any holes left by the removal of such ties shall be made good. Formwork shall be provided fortop faces of sloping work and anchored to prevent floatations, but this shall apply only where the slope exceeds 15degrees. The formwork for beams and slabs shall be erected so that the sides of the beams and soffit of the slab can beremoved without disturbing the beam bottoms. Props for an upper storey immediately below and the lowest prop shallbear upon work sufficiently strong to carry this load.

If formwork for columns, walls and other deep sections is erected to the full height, one side shall be left open and shallbe built up in sections as placing of the concrete proceeds. Before concreting, bolts and fixings shall be in position.Cores and other devices used for forming of openings, holes, chases, recesses and other cavities shall be fixed to theformwork and no subsequent holes shall be cut in any concrete without the Engineer’s approval.

Specifications 9

15.3 Mixing of Concrete

All concrete shall be mixed in batch mixing machines. Hand mixing shall not be permitted. All mixing machines shallbe of the fixed drum type and not smaller in size than AC/28m3 except with the approval of the Engineer in writing.Tilting drum mixer will not be permitted. The mixer shall be of the type equipped with accurate measuring devices,designed so that no unauthorized person can tamper with valve or vary the quantity of water delivered once this has beenapproved and set. The mixing procedure to be adopted by the contractor shall be approved by the Engineer. Mixing ofeach batch shall continue until the concrete is uniform in color and, in any case, for not less than two minutes after allthe materials and water are used in the drum. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before the materialsfor succeeding batch are fed into the drum. Upon completion of the days mixing, the drum shall be thoroughly cleanedfree of adhering concrete.

15.4. Distributing of ConcreteThe concrete shall be distributed from the mixer to the position required by approved means, which do not cause

separation or otherwise impair the quality of the concrete. All equipment shall be cleaned before commencing mixingand distribution and be kept free from set concrete. All concrete must be in position and consolidated before the initialset is commenced and the Contractor shall ascertain the initial setting time for the brand of cement being used andensure that his means of distribution are such that it is impossible for concrete to have set prior to placing.

Distribution by means of a mortar pail generally will be permitted, but for the large structures such as slabs, large beds,ramps and run ways and elsewhere where instructed by the Engineer the minimum requirements shall be wheelbarrows.

15.5 Placing of ConcreteBefore placing of concrete commences, the formwork shall be examined and any accumulated water and rubbish lyingtherein shall be removed. The concrete shall be placed as near to its permanent position as is practicable and shall not beworked along the formwork to that position. It shall not be dropped from a height nor handled in a manner likely tocause separation of the aggregate or loss of cement matrix. In columns and other similar members the bottom shall be incolumns and other similar members the bottom shall be first filled to a depth of between 150 mm and 20mm with acement mortar consisting of sand, cement and water with the sand and cement in the same proportions as that specifiedfor the general mix in that member. The mortar shall have a consistency such that it will work up the formwork and fillspaces, which may occur due to close spacing of reinforcement in the splice. This mortar must be placed immediately inadvance of the concrete and shall not be allowed to attain its initial set before pacing the main concrete for the member.Each layer of concrete, while being placed, shall be consolidated by approved methods of ramming/tamping ormechanical vibration so as to form a dense homogenous material free from honeycombing, water and air holes or otherblemishes. Concrete shall be placed continuously until completion of the part of the work between the specifiedconstruction joints. Approved working joints shall be made wherever stooping of concrete placing occurs. In general,concrete shall be placed in a single operation to the full thickness and placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 750 mmdeep in walls, columns and other similar members.

15.6 VibrationMechanical vibrators or hand tamping must be used in placing all reinforced concrete work unless the Engineer hasapproved specially designed mixes and preliminary work cube test results have been obtained without their use. Ratesfor all reinforced concrete work included for this. Where mechanical vibration is required the contractor shall allow forusing two vibrators at any one time.

16. Working Joints

Working joints shall be of an approved shape and placed at right angles to the axis of the member. All day work jointsand construction joints to follow the line of boards on shutter. In fair faced work walls to be poured where possible inone lift to a minimum of 3.60m. Walls higher than this to be constructed in two equal pours. Kickers at bottom of wallsto be cast against a straight edge set in shutter and too be 50 mm above structural level of floor. The Contractor shallsubmit his proposals for the design and positioning of all joints on drawing to the Engineer for his approval well beforeconstruction is commenced. The position of day-to-day working joints may be determined so as to meet therequirements of the Contractor’s concreting programme.

Specifications 10

Wherever new concrete is to be placed against concrete that has hardened, the face of the old concrete shall becut back not less than 20 mm and all loose particles removed. The face shall then be wire brushed andthoroughly cleaned with water and then coated with a neat cement grout immediately before placing concrete.The new concrete shall be well rammed and compacted against the prepared face before the neat cement groutsets.

17. Protection of ConcreteNewly placed concrete shall be protected by approved means from rains, sun and dry winds, and exposed faces shall bekept moist with polythene sheets or hessian coverings or other approved means for at least 7 days. Under nocircumstances shall concrete be worked upon until it has reached cube strength of 140 kg per square centimeter.Immature concrete shall be protected from damage by falling debris, excessive loading, and vibrations, running orstanding water, abrasive or other influences likely to impair the quality or strength of the finished work.

18. Concrete in ExcavationsThe length and widths of the excavation shall be necessary for the proper construction of work below ground and inaccordance with the preambles contained in the section “Excavation and Earthwork”. Blinding concrete has beenmeasured for the net width required for concrete structures and foundations below ground level. Blinding has not beenmeasured to the extra width, if any, required for working space. The depths shall be decided by the Engineer wherethese are not given on the drawings. Any obstructions or unusual solids encountered during the excavations shall bereported to the Engineer and dealt with as then instructed.

19. Removal of Formwork

The period ellapsing between placing of concrete and removing the form work shall be sufficient to allow the concreteto mature to the extent of being able to maintain its own weight and any constructional and structural loads imposedwithout damage. The Engineer’s approval for the removal of the formwork shall be as tabulated below:

POSITIONS OF FORM WORKS MINIMUM STRIKING TIME

Sides Of Walls And Columns 2 Days

Beam Soffit (Props Left In) 7 Days

Beam Props 14 Days

The formwork shall be removed in all cases by gradual easing without jarring and the process shall be such that thesharp edges of the concrete are not clipped and spilled away. If the imposition of a load exceeding the design load isanticipated, props shall be provided in an approved manner after removal of the formwork and before the imposition ofthe loads.

20. Surface Finishes

Upon removal of the form work any honeycombing or damaged surfaces or other imperfections shall be reported to theEngineer. No surface shall be repaired or otherwise treated until an inspection has been carried out by the Engineer andhis instructions or approval to the remedial work (if any) have been given or obtained.Concrete surfaces which are to be plastered or rendered are to be hacked or roughened by an approved means to form akey.Sawn formwork is assumed for all surfaces requiring support and subsequently concealed or plastered

21. Precast Concrete

Where precast concrete members are specified, these shall be constructed in moulds of approved design and samplesfrom the moulds shall be approved before mass production of the member is commenced. Large precast members shallbe lifted only at points which will not damage the members and if necessary temporary bracing of timber shall be usedto case the member until it is in position. Small lintels and other small members may be cast in-situ at no extra cost at

Specifications 11

the Contractors option. Allowance must in all case be made for any extra reinforcement to counteract temporary stresseswhilst handling, transporting and hoisting precast concrete members. Mould for precast units described as finished fairon exposed surface shall be lined with plywood or hardboard to leave a fair finish on the exposed concrete face when;the mould is removed.The concrete shall be of the grade specified on the drawings but maximum aggregate size 12 mm and shall bethoroughly vibrated in the moulds and shall not be removed until seven days after placing the concrete.

Care must be taken that no concrete is allowed to become prematurely dry and the fresh concrete must carefully beprotected from the rain, sun and wind by means of “sisalkraft” paper, well-wetted sacking, wet sand or other approvedmeans. This protective layer and the concrete itself must be kept continuously wet for at least seven days after theconcrete has been placed.

Prices for precast concrete shall include for all moulds, reinforcement as specified, hoisting and fixing in the positionrequired, bedding and pointing as described and temporary props and other necessary support.

22. Sub-Contractors Work incorporated in the structure

It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to co-ordinate Sub-Contractors and others for incorporating any electricalconduct, plumbing fixtures and pipes, bolt holes, etc. in the concrete members as required and shown on the drawings.The contractors shall submit details of cable and pipe runs to the Structural Engineer before the work is put in hand andshall have the Engineer’s approval for the layout. No holes or chases shall be cut on concrete without the approval ofthe Engineer.

22.1 General

No holes or chase are to be cut in any part of the reinforced concrete construction without first consulting the StructuralEngineer. No part of the reinforcement shall be used for conducting electrical current. Notice must be taken of anythingappearing on the drawing and not mentioned in these preambles.

23. Expansion and Separation jointsExpansion joints shall comprise:

Bitumen impregnated soft board or similar approved. Joint topping is to be “Plastic joint” or similar approved bituminous putty applied with a gun. Joints are to be at

least 12 mm deep and the gap is to be formed by ranking out (in the case of expanded polystyrene) or bytemporary wooden battens of the required width and 12 mm.

24. Mortises and PocketsMortises or pockets for holding down bolts or dowels shall be formed in concrete to the size and shapes shown on thedrawings. Mortises shall be formed by the use of expanded polystyrene blocks of the required shapes and sizescarefully and accurately placed and maintained in position whilst the concrete is poured. Rates for mortises shallinclude for all necessary templates and ranking out and the complete removal of the polystyrene when the concrete hasset.

25. Ready Mixed ConcreteReady mixed concrete may only be used with the permission of the Engineer. The use of ready-mixedconcrete shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations and the appropriate clauses of thesespecifications shall apply to the Ready-Mixed concrete supplier. Concrete test tubes shall be taken on the siteat the point and time of discharge in accordance with this specification irrespective of any cubes that thesupplier may take at his own works.

26. Strength and SoundnessThe strength and soundness of the concrete will be generally determined by cube tests, Schmidt hammer tests or by anyother method which the Engineer considers to be appropriate and suitable. The opinion of the Engineer regarding thesoundless and acceptability of the finished concrete shall be final.

Specifications 12

SECTION 3 – BLOCKWORK

1. WaterWater shall be as previously specified in “Concrete Work”

2. CementCement shall be as previously specified in “Concrete Work”

3. Fine AggregateFine aggregate shall be as previously specified in “Concrete Work”

4. Course AggregateCourse aggregate shall be as previously specified in “Concrete Work” and shall comprise aggregate of 6, 10 and 20 mmgrading in equal proportions.

5. LimeHydrated limes for cement/lime mortars shall comply with BS 890 semi-hydraulic Class “B” calcium lime.

6. Concrete BlocksSolid and hollow concrete blocks for walls shall comply with BS. 2028 type “A” except that the recommended mix shallbe 1:3:6 cement, fine and coarse aggregate respectively by volume and are to have sharp arises. Blocks are to bemanufactured on site in approved block-making machines and shall be solid or two cavities hollow types as specified onthe drawings. No damaged blocks shall be used in walling and half or other part blocks required to maintain bond shallbe cut true and even.

The concrete is to be placed into the moulds in thin layers and shall be properly tamped or vibrated to secure completeconsolidation without voids or flaws and to produce smooth surfaces and sharp straight corners.

Blocks shall be cast on loose pallets and after removal from the moulds shall be carefully stored under cover for at least24 hours before the pallets are removed. The blocks shall thereafter be stored under cover for a further seven daysprotected from the sun and drying of the blocks may commence on the ninth day after manufacture and no blocks maybe used within 14 days of their production.

The comprehensive strength of the type “A” concrete blocks shall not be less than:

Average of 13 blocks 50 kg per square centimeter(700 lbs per square inch)

Lowest individual block 40kg per square centimeter(580 lbs per square inch)

7. Concrete LouversConcrete louver blocks shall be of approved type and manufacture. The blocks shall be with inclined faces and ofoverall size 460x150x160 (excluding lip protruding outside the bending face).

8. Hollow WallsHollow walls shall be built with cavities of the width shown on the drawings, the two thickness of blockwork shall bebonded together with wall ties, as described span 900 mm apart horizontally, 300 mm vertically and staggered and withextra ties at reveals and openings; the ties are to be carefully laid so that they do not fall towards the inner thickness ofthe walls. The cavity is to be kept clear by lifting screeds or other suitable means. Openings shall be left at the base toenable the cavity to be cleaned out at completion and the openings shall subsequently be blocked up uniformly with thesurrounding work.

When polystyrene insulation is to be fixed in the cavities it shall be inserted as the blockwork proceeds and cut and fixedto wall ties.

Specifications 13

The polystyrene shall be completely immersed in bituminous paint before fixing. Before the polystyrene is fixed in thecavity the inner face of the outer blockwork leaf shall have two coats of bituminous paint applied as the work progress.

9. Natural Stone WallsAll stone shall comply with the requirements of CP121.202 for masonry and natural stone walls except where amendedor extended by the following clauses:

Unless otherwise noted, all masonry walls shall be course squared natural stone walling with mortar joints. The size ofstones for natural stone walling shall be such that the length of stone does not exceed three times its height. For coursedsquared natural stone walls block shall not exceed 300mm in height and shall be not less that 150mm in height.

Where snecked natural stone walls are specified; the snecks shall not be less than 100mm square on the exposed face.Stone for masonry shall have a minimum compressive strength of 10 N/mm2. (Stone shall not be required to be tested tofailure). The density of stone for masonry shall be not less than 230kg/m3. The drying shrinkage of stone shall notexceed 0.05%.

Samples of stone provided for testing shall be tested for the following in accordance with the methods given in BS 2028,1364 and the test results shall comply with the requirements of this specification.

(a) Compressive strength(b) Density(c) Drying shrinkage

The colour and texture of stone shall be uniform and consistent. Prior to delivering any stone to site the Contractor shallsupply the Architect with a sample of stone in order that he may approve the colour and texture. The Contractor shallensure that sufficient suitable stone is available for the whole of the project prior to ordering the stone.

Where cast stone including described as artificial stone, reconstructed stone, etc, is specified the stone shall comply withthe requirements of BS1217. Masonry shall be of stone, having no irregular faces and only the back face if not visibleshall be left as from the saw.

Prior to ordering dry stone the Contractor shall demonstrate that the stone is durable. This may be done by supplyingdetails of building constructed with stone from the quarry and which has been exposed to the same environmentcondition for at least ten years. The maximum projection from the face of stone for natural stone walls shall be 20mmbeyond the specified face of the wall.

The Contractor shall provide six samples of stone measuring 200mm x 200mm for testing prior to delivering any stone tosite. As work proceeds the contractor shall provide six samples 200 x 200 x 400mm for testing from every 300m2 ofwork. All stone shall be stacked on prepared dry areas free of clinker, ashes and sulphate bearing strata.

10. Fair Face WorkWalls described as finished with fair face shall be constructed with blocks or stones selected for their uniformity of sizeand with a smooth exposed face with no chips, blemishes, pinholes or cracks. Walling shall be pointed with a neat flushjoint as work proceeds and on completion shall be brushed down and left thoroughly clean.

11. MortarThe mortar used for walling shall be composed of one part of cement to four parts of sand (1:4) measured in gaugeboxes and thoroughly mixed and preferably with an approved mechanical mixer or on clean and approved mixingplatform with water added afterwards until all parts are completely incorporated and brought to a proper consistency andused within the hour. No partially or wholly set mortar will be allowed to be reused or remixed.

The constituent materials shall be measured separately when dry in specially prepared gauge boxes of sizes to give theproportions specified without consolidation of the contents by ramming and shaking. The mortar shall be mixed in anapproved power driven mixer for not less than two minutes per batch and using the minimum quantity of waternecessary to obtain a working consistency. The mixer shall be used as close as practicable to the works and mortar shallbe used within 30 minutes of mixing. No partially or wholly set mortar will be allowed to be used or re-mixed.

Specifications 14

12. WorkmanshipAll blocks and stone to be wetted before laying out and the top of walling where left of previously shall be well wettedbefore recommencing building. Walls shall be kept wet three days after building.

All walling to be built true, plumb and level with all perpends vertical and in line and work shall not rise more than 900mm above the adjoining work and all such rising are to be properly raked back.

13. General Construction

(a) Setting outThe Contractor shall provide proper setting out rods and set out all work on same for course, openings, heights etc,and shall build the walls, piers etc, to the widths, depths and heights indicated on the Drawings and as directed bythe Architect.

(b) Building in wood framesOpenings for doors, ventilators etc, are to be set out and left unbuilt until the wooden frames have been fixed inposition.

(c) Building in metal windows and doorsOpenings for metal frames to be wide enough for the frames to fit without being forced into position. Build the lugsinto the joints of the walling and fill into the space between the walling and frames with cement mortar will tampedinto the channels of the frames and point all round externally.

All frames must be set plumb and level and free from twist.

(d) Walls to receive plaster & similar finishesAll faces of walls to be plastered etc, to have all projections dressed off and joints raked out as key.

14. Damp Proof CourseDamp proof course between foundation walls and the over-site concrete slab shall be hessian based bitumen strip to BS.743 Type 5A the same width as the block walls. The damp proof course shall be bedded in cement mortar (1:4) with150mm end laps and full width as passing and angles.

Damp proof courses are required on all external and internal foundation walls.

15. Wall ReinforcementWhere described walls and partitions shall be reinforced with a 25mm wide strip of No. 20S.W.G hoop iron built intoalternate horizontal joints in the wall centre. The reinforcement shall be lapped and hooked at running joints, angles andintersections and carried at least 115mm into abutting walls at junctions.

16. Wall TiesTo be 3mm diameter galvanized mild steel wire twisted butterfly wall ties.

17. Building Walling

(a) Laying and jointingAll blocks shall be well wetted before being laid and the top of walling where left off shall be well wetted beforecommencing. Walls to be kept wet three days after building. All walls throughout the works shall be carried upevenly in 200mm courses except where courses of less depth are required to bring walling up to level of floors,windows and the like and where otherwise described, no part being allowed to be carried up more than one metrehigher at one time than any other part and in such cases the joining shall be made long in steps so as to preventcracks arising and all walls shall be leveled round at each stage. Not more than 3metres height of wall shall be laidin any one day.

Specifications 15

(b) BondingThe blocks shall be properly bonded together and in such a manner that no vertical joint in any one course shall bewithin 115mm of a similar in the courses immediately above or below. All walling of 300mm thickness or less shallbe built in single thickness of blocks. Walling exceeding 300mm in thickness shall be built with through bondersnot more than 1070mm apart in each course as directed by the Architect.

Alternate courses of walling at all angles and intersections shall be carried through the full thickness of the adjoiningwall. All perpends, reveals and other angles of the walling shall be built strictly true and square.

(c) TolerancesAll courses of walls shall be level with a maximum deviation of +/- 3mm in any one metre length and a maximumdeviation of +/- 3mm in any metre height of wall with a maximum deviation of +/- mm in the height of the wall orany storey.

All corners of walls which shall be an average of 10mm thick with a maximum deviation of +/-3mm in any onemetre length and a maximum overall deviation of 10mm in any length exceeding 3 metres.

All bed and vertical joints shall be an average of 10mm thick with a maximum deviation of 3+/- of block work, andstone natural stone walls. Joints for stone masonry walls shall be 6mm +/- mm thick.

(d) CuringAll walls shall be maintained in damp conditions for at least 24 hours after laying. Walls under construction shall bedampened by applying water with a brush and no hosing directly on to the wall shall be permitted. When workceases on any section of wall polythene or Hessian shall be draped over the wall, for at least 24 hours. If Hessian isused, it shall be maintained continuously wet.

(e) CavitiesCavity walls shall be of the overall thickness shown on the drawings.

Cavities above ground level between leaves of block or masonry shall be free of mortar droppings or their debris.The Contractor shall take proper precautions to prevent mortar or debris entering the cavity.

Cavity below ground level shall be filled with mortar for cavities up to 75mm wide and for cavities over 75mm widefilling shall be concrete mix 1:3:6. Cavities shall be filled such that there is maximum of three times the thicknessof the thinner leaf of the wall filled wit wet mortar or concrete unless the wall is continuously supported for thedepth.

(f) BackfillingEarth backfilling shall not be carried out such that the level of the backfill is always equal on each side of the wall.When a wall has filling material on one side only to a fill width of more than three times the wall thickness, the wallshall be continuously supported during backfilling.

Backfilling shall not be carried out until at least seven days have elapsed since the laying of the blocks or stone.

18. Reinforcement in Walls.Steel reinforcing bars in walls shall be carefully placed and spacers used to ensure that a minimum or 20mm cover isgiven to the reinforcement unless otherwise specified. Horizontal reinforcement in mortar joints shall be laid such thatthe reinforcement is not in contact with the blocks or stone.

19. Wall TiesWall ties shall be provided to connect walls to steel or concrete columns and beams to connect two unbounded leaves ofwall.

20. PointingPointing of walls shall be carried out as the work proceeds wherever possible. When coloured mortar is specified forpointing shall be carried out after work has been completed.

Specifications 16

Existing walls shall be prepared for pointing by raking out all loose friable material to a minimum depth of 15mm toform a square recess. The joints shall then be wetted and new mortar shall be forced into joints and finished as directed.

21. Holes, Cutting and Chasing(a) All putlog holes shall be not less than one course deep and carefully filled with a block cut to fit size of opening

with beds and joints filled with mortar well tamped in after scaffolding is removed, and if in faced walls to matchfacing.

(b) Where walling is cut, holed or chased for conduits, pipes and the like all such cuttings etc., shall be filled in solidwith cement mortar (1:4) prior to the application of finishes.

Specifications 17

SECTION 4 – ROOFING

1. Cement and SandThe cement and sand roof finish is to be mixed in the proportions as described and shall incorporate an approvedwaterproof additive and an approved hardener.

2. Bituminous “Built-up” RoofingBitumen based roof covering shall be composed of three layers of single ply roofing felt of specified quality weight andmake.

Each layer laid shall be lapped not less than 76 mm at all edges and layers shall be bonded together and to the subsurface with approved bituminous compound or hot bitumen.

At abutments the felt shall be carried over 76 mm prepared angle fillets up walls or beams etc, or a specified distanceand tucked into grooves chases or under parapets as required.

3. Tropicalised mastic Asphalt RoofingAsphalt roofing will be executed by an approved specialist roofing sub-contractor. Before any application of roofing thecontractor is to ensure that all roof surfaces are thoroughly cleaned by sweeping.

Roofing asphalt to be BS 988/1966 Table 3 COLUMN 111 Tropical Mastic asphalt laid in two coats to a total thicknessof 20mm on and including black sheathing felt, and finished with either three coats aluminum paint to horizontal andvertical surfaces local grey stone chippings or precast concrete paving slabs as necessary.

The first layer of asphalt to be fully bonded in the sheathing felt and the second layer to be laid with a 75mm joint to thefirst layer. At all junctions of covering with parapet walls, kerbs, eaves, gutters etc., the asphalt is to be turned up aminimum height of 150mm with an angle fillet at the junction with the roof covering and splayed at the tip and tucked25mm into groove and pointed in cement and sand.

Precast concrete tiles are to be 250 x 250 x 20mm thick, interlocking, finished fair on exposed face and bedded inbitumen and pointed in cement mortar.

4. Fulbora roof OutletsThe fulbora outlets shall be as manufactured by Fulbora ltd, hatfield, herts, England and Fixed in accordance with themanufacturer’s instructions.

5. TilingMaterialsMetal roofing tiles shall be as supplied by Space and Style Limited, Nairobi or equivalent, and shall be laid and fixedstrictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s fixing instructions.

WorkmanshipThe whole of the roof indicated on the drawings to be covered with the tiles specified. All laps, ridges, verges,abutments, valleys, hips and other edges to be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Colas Roof Waterproofing

Colas roof and planting box waterproofing shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer or supplier and laid inaccordance with the manufacturers instructions to the approval of the Architect. Surfaces shall be prepared in thefollowing manner:-

(a) Lay 60mm faced triangular fillets at all internal wall to roof intersections using a mortar comprised of 1 volume ofcolmastic 30.01 and 2 volumes of sand.

(b) Parapet walls and other vertical surfaces must be smooth. Brickwork shall be flush pointed or rendered with acement/sand mix, to a height of 250mm.

Specifications 18

(c) Rain water outlets shall be fixed firmly to but below the level of the roof slab. They should be free to moveindependently of the down pipe.

(d) When the concrete and/or mortar applications are set and dry, brush the surface free of all dirt, dust, laitance andloose materials. Apply, by brush or spray, a coating of colas prime 80.05 and allow this to dry.

(e) Day work joints, shrinkage cracks or fillets shall be treated by applying a heavy coat of colaskote 70.02 into whichshould be embedded a strip of colas membrane 88.08, free of wrinkles. This strip shall extend, in width, 80mm onboth sides of the joint/fillet being treated. A further coat of 70.02 shall be applied over the 88.08 and allowed to dry.

Colas waterproofing shall be applied as follows:

(a) Apply heavy brush of colaskote 70.02 0.75 litres per sq.metre laid on in one direction. Allow to dry.

(b) Apply a further heavy brush coat of colaskote 70.02 laid on right angles to the previous coat, and whilst this is stillwet, ambed a layer of colas membrane 88.08. (Note: Edges of the membrane should be overlapped by 80mm.Allow to dry.

(c) Apply a heavy brush coat of colaskate 70.01 laid on at right angles to the previous coat. Allow to dry.

Colas roof waterproofing shall be finished with two coats colaskate 71.04 aluminum reflective paint. The first coat shall beallowed to dry before application of the second coat. Before application of the first coat of reflective paint the colaskotewaterproofing shall be dusted with clean, sharp, fine sand whilst still wet and excess sand thoroughly brushed off when theemulsion is dry.

7. Roof Screed Generally

Roof screeds are to be laid to a minimum fall and cross fall of 27mm in 3.0 metres with a minimum thickness of 19mmat rainwater outlets and are to be finished to the entire satisfaction of the subcontractor executing the roofing.

8. Lightweight Roof Screeds

Lightweight roof screeds shall be composed of bases of cement, sand and pumice (1:4:8) finished with a 12mm cementand sand (1:5) topping laid whilst the base is still green and trowelled smooth to the satisfaction of the Architect.

The screeds are to be laid as described in ‘cement and sand Roof Screeds’

9. PVC Rainwater PipesPVC rainwater pipes and fittings are to comply with BS 4576 with solvent welded or rubber ring seal joints.

Pipes are to be cased into concrete or to be fixed to the structure with PVC holder bats built-in plugged and screwed atmaximum 2 metre centres

Bends, swan necks, discharge chutes and fittings generally are to be fixed where necessary to facilitate the flow of water.

Rainwater outlets shall be PVC suitable for the roof finish in which they occur with domical PVC grating.

10. Protection

The Contractor is to make all necessary precautions to protect the finished work and must ensure no damage occurs tothe roofing until completion of the works.

Specifications 19

Section 5 – CARPENTRY

1. Timber GenerallyThe timber used for carpentry shall be sound, well conditioned, properly seasoned to suit the particular use and free fromdefects or combination of defects rendering it unsuitable for the purpose intended.

All other used structurally shall comply with the relevant requirements of and graded in accordance with the export oftimber ordinance (Cap. 288) - The export and Grading of Timber rules 1969.

All timber is to be ordered as soon Contract is signed and is to be delivered to the site for open stacking for as long aspossible before use. All timber will be inspected by the Engineer upon arrival at the site and if not approved by himshall be removed from the site forthwith. Not withstanding the Engineer’s approval, any timber incorporated in theworks found too be in any way defective before the expiry date of the defects liability period shall be removed andreplaced at the sole expense of the Contractor.

Timber shall be free from live borer beetle or other insect attack when brought to the site. The Contractor shall beresponsible to the end of Defects liabilities period for executing any work necessary to eradicate insect attack at orsuspected of being attacked notwithstanding that the timber may have been inspected already and passed fit for use.

2. Moisture ContentAll timber shall be seasoned to moisture content, if not otherwise specified of not more than 15%. The contractor mustallow for the cost of any kiln drying which may be necessary to obtain this figure.

3. Samples and TestingThe Engineer shall be entitled to select any sample he may reasonable require of materials or prototype of especialconstruction elements for the purpose f testing (e.g. for moisture content, identification of species, strength etc.).

4. ProtectionAll timber delivered to the site shall be stored under cover clear of the ground and protected from sun and dampness andshall be stored in a satisfactory manner to prevent attack of termites, insects and fungi.

5. Soft woodTimber for structural use, including rafters, purling, etc shall be of grade 11 strength and grade 1 appearance. Thesoftwood shall be seasoned cypress, cedar pine or podocarpus which shall be pressure impregnated with the full cellprocess as described below, but the Contractors attention is drawn to the Day works Schedule where the basic price ofvarious timber requires pricing, in the event of one of these timbers being selected as an; alternative then these basicrates will be used in calculating new rates for the item of carpentry concerned.

6. Pressure ImpregnantationThe softwood described, as pressure impregnated shall be treated with the “Celcure A” or “Tenolith C” full cell process.Timber ust be seasoned to a moisture content not exceeding 25% before being treated. The treatment shall be to theminimum standard of:

Solution concentration - 2%

Absorption of preservative - 520 liters per cu. m

Net dry salt retention - 10.4 kg per Cu. m

After treatment the timber shall be seasoned to the specified moisture content.

Cut ends and faces of timber sawn, drilled and cut after treatment are to be swabbed liberally with approved preservativeuntil saturated, allowed to dry and then treated with a second coat and rates for timer shall be included for this.Approved preservatives are:

Atlas A Brunophen No.2

Specifications 20

Cupricol Clear or Water Repellent Clear.

Ensele Woodtreat 55

7. Hard woodHardwood for structural and roof timber shall be third grade scantlings, strength group 1 or other suitable and approveddurable hardwood

8. Preservative TreatmentOn delivery to the site all structural hardwood is to be treated with two coats of an approved timber preservative.After mixing, the hardwood is to be touched up as required with approved timber preservatives.

The timber preservative shall be coal-tar creosote to BS.144 or other equal and approved applied either by brush or byspraying in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions.

Cut ends and faces of timber sawn drilled and cut after treatment are to be swabbed liberally with approvedpreservative until saturated, allowed to dry and then treated with a second coat and rates for timber must include for this.

9. NailsNails shall be galvanized and comply with B.S 1202 and screws with BS 1201. Screws shall be brass unless otherwisedescribed. Bolts, nuts and washers shall comply with BS 916 and gar bolts, coach screws and other accessories shallcomply with BS 1494. Washers shall be square minimum 3mm thick and 3mm sides.

10 Workmanship“Unwrought” or sawn timber shall be as left from the saw and shall be to the full dimensions stated.

All carpentry shall be executed with workmanship of the best quality. Scantlings and boarding shall be accurately sawnand shall be uniform width and thickness throughout. All carpentry work shall be left with sawn faces except whereparticularly specified to the wrot.

All carpentry shall be accurately set out in strict accordance with the drawings.

All structural timbers shall be framed or jointed together as is most appropriate in the circumstances in accordance withthe rules of good practice. Joints must be executed in strict conformity with the drawings.

All joints shall be secured with a sufficient number of nails disposed as shown of the drawings and rates must includefor the joining of timbers. Surfaces must be in a good contact over the whole area of the joint before securing. Holes fornails must be pre-drilled undersize; holes for bolts must be bored slightly oversize form both sides of the timber andwashers must be used under the nut which should be tightened sufficiently to permanently secure the joint but not tocrush the timber.

2.18

Specifications 21

Section 6 – JOINERY

1. GenerallyThe provisions contained in the Carpentry Section shall apply also in the Joinery Section where applicable.

2. HardwareJoinery is to be executed in approved time, select and locally available hardwood. Hardwood generally will becamphor (pterocarpus angolansis) but hardwood for fittings and built-in furniture may be:

Mahogany - unless specifically described.

3 WorkmanshipAll timber shall be wrot by machine dressing on exposed faces, with all machine marks sanded out, unless otherwisespecified.

The joinery shall be worked strictly in accordance with the detailed drawings and is to be framed up and put together assoon as possible and is to be stored for as long as possible before wedged up. All joints and angles are to be glued andwhere necessary cross-tongued with hardwood tongues, and the surface finished clean and smooth with machine markssand papered out before fixing.

Should any of the joinery work shrink, wind or fly unduly before the end of the maintenance period of the contract, thework is to be taken down, and new work fixed in its place, together with any other work, which may thereby beaffected at the Contractor’s expense.

Where joinery is described as screwed, this is deemed to include sinking the head of the screw and pelting with similartimber and to grain in with finished joinery. Screws unless specified, shall be brass.

In pricing the items, the Contractor will allow for nails and screws and fixing, all labors, cutting, notching, halving,mortising, tenoning and welding except where otherwise provided.

Allow in the rates for easing and adjusting all doors, and leave in perfect working order.

The dimensions and thickness given in these tender documents are finished (unless otherwise stated). In the event ofnominal sizes being stated then an allowance of 3mm should be allowed for each wrot face.

4. Flush DoorsFlush doors shall consist of hardwood core or framing covered with 6mm plywood both sides and complying whereapplicable with the requirements of BS. 459, part 2 and 2A. Doors described, as Skeleton framed shall consist offraming 125mm wide to all stiles, top and bottom rails, with suitable blocks to receive mortise locks on each long edge.Doors described, as solid core shall comprise a solid core of vertical laminations. All flush doors shall be edged allround with 25mm thick hardwood lipping tongued and glued in. Doors described as external shall be covered both sideswith 6mm “exterior” quality plywood as described below. All flush doors shall be perfectly plain on both faces and freeform waves, ripples or distortions of any kind. Any doors which, after the application of paint or polish shows anydefect of this nature, shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Samples of flush doors, which theContractor intends to use, must be first submitted to the Architect for his approval.

5. PlywoodPlywood shall be of approved manufacture, manufactured for tropical hardwoods of the first grade with BS. 1455, andunless otherwise stated, shall be interior quality. Where stated to be “exterior” quality, plywood shall be W.B.P. bondedweatherproof grade. Where veneered plywood is specified, samples must be submitted to the Architect for his priorapproval.

6. Block boardBlock board shall be of approved manufacture and comply with BS. 3444 and shall be of moisture resistant quality

7. ChipboardChipboard shall comply with BS 2604 resin-bonded wood chipboard

Specifications 22

8. PluggingAll work described as plugged shall be fixed with brass screws to plugs formed by drilling concrete, walls etc, with ascrew of suitable “Phil plug”, “Raw plastic” or other approved plugging compound in accordance with themanufacturer’s instructions.

9. ProtectionAny fixed joinery which, in the opinion of the Architect is liable to become damaged in any way shall be cased andprotected by the Contractor until the completion of the works and the Contractor must allow for this in his rates as noseparate item for protection has been allowed.

10. IronmongeryAll Ironmongery will be fixed with matching screws to be supplied by the Contractor and the Contractor must allow foradjusting locks and striking plates and handling over all keys on completion of the contract with identifying tagsattached.The contractor must also allow for oiling locks and hinges and leaving them in perfect working order. All ironmongeryshall be as those manufactured by Josiah Parkes and Sons ltd or other Equal and approved by the Architect.The following standard abbreviations have been used too describe the finish to ironmongery: -

S.C.P - Satin Chromo Plate

C.P - Chromo Plate (Polished)

S.A.A - Silver Anodized Aluminum

Windows shall Brass plated handles and window stays and or as described elsewhere in these documents.

2.20

Specifications 23

SECTION 7 – METAL WORKS

1. Mild SteelMild steel shall comply with BS. 15, Grade 1, and the size of all small sections shall be in accordance with BS 4 and 4A.

2. Structural SteelworksSteel angles and plates are to be weldable mild steel Grade 43A in accordance with BS. 4360

Electrodes for welding are to be in accordance with BS. 639.

All welds are to be fillet welds of 5mm by size unless otherwise indicated.

Bolts are to be black bolts in accordance with BS. 4190, and all nuts, bolts and washers are to be hot dip galvanized.Bolts holes are to have a diameter of not more than 2mm greater than the; diameter of the bolt.

All steelworks is to be thoroughly cleaned, wire brushed and painted with two-coats of zinc chromate primer and onefinishing coat of gloss paint at the workshop. After erection any damage to the paint is too be made good and a furtherfinishing coat applied.

3. Galvanized WorkIron and steel, where galvanized shall comply with BS. 729, part 1, entirely coated with zinc after fabrication by completeimmersion in a zinc bath in one operation and all excess carefully removed. The finished surface shall be clean anduniform.

4. AluminumAluminum shall be of the alloys described in and shall comply with BS. 1470, aluminum sheet for flashing shall be soft-temper, super purity (SI or SIA) and not less than 18 S.W.G (1.2 mm) in thickness.

5. Smithing, Welding and CuttingAll smithing, welding, cutting and bending shall be soundly and neatly executed, care being taken not to overheat.All flame cut edges and welds shall be neatly ground off on completion. All welds shall be 8mm fillet welds to complywith BS Code of Practice 1856 unless shown otherwise.

6. BoltsMild steel bolts, nut and washers shall comply with BS. 916 for black bolts with hexagonal heads and nuts, high Tensilesteel bolts and nuts are in accordance with BS. 3139, part 1.

7. Mild Steel TubingMild steel tubing shall be in accordance with BS 1387, 1957 with screwed sockets and joints.

8. Anchor- BoltsAnchor-bolts in concrete for steelworks, etc, are to be self-drilling anchor bolts of one of the following types: -

Philips redhead concrete

Rawplug super drill anchor

Spit self drilling anchors

9. Shop InspectionThe Architect shall be granted full facilities and any necessary assistance for inspection of materials and assembled partsin the Contractor’s (or his Sub-Contractor’s) workshops. At least two weeks notice shall be given to the Architect inwriting prior to the dispatch of finished components to the site to enable the Architect to inspect and approve the materialsand workmanship at the workshops. Approval of works at the workshops does not relieve the Contractor of hisobligations to carry out the works complete at the site to the Architect’s satisfaction in accordance with the contract.

2.21

Specifications 24

10. MarketingAll components delivered to the site are to be marked in paint with the mark number in accordance with any shop anderection drawings

11. StorageAll components are to be stored at the site in proper racks provided for the purpose, which provide full support to eachmember, and to obviate any deflection and distortion. Steelworks is to be stored at least 25 cm clear of the ground and thetemporary protection is to be provided for protection against water and damage from any other source.

12. ErectionRates for metalwork are to include for the complete erection including any temporary supports required and anynecessary templates and wedges.

13. PaintingAll steel is to be thoroughly de-rusted and de-greased prior to dispatch to the site and is to be given two coats of red leadprimer at the works. Further painting treatment will be carried out at the site. The finishing coat of paint and the costthereof is to be included in the rates for metalwork.

2.22

Specifications 25

SECTION 8 – PLUMBING AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATION

1. Execution Of The WorkThe work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with: -

a. “British Standard Code of practice” C.P. 310:1965: Water supplyb. “British Standard Code of Practice C.P. 304:1968: Sanitary Pipe work above groundc. All other relevant British Standard Specifications and Codes of Practiced. The working drawings.

The plumbing work shall be carried out by a specific and, if the Contractor is not a firm approved by the Engineer for thetype and/or value of plumbing Installations contained in this contract, he must sublet this work to a specialist sub-contractorwho is approved.

2. Extent of WorkThe work includes, unless otherwise specified, supply installation, testing and commissioning and delivering up clean and inworking order the installation shown on the drawings and specified in these preambles including all details such as: -

Cold water pipes, discharge (the term discharge pope is in these specification used as a comprehensive all embracingdescription in place of the traditional soil and waste terms), drain and ventilating pipes, water maters, valves, sanitaryappliances including all necessary taps and discharge fittings, fire fighting installations and equipment, and all labor,materials, tools, instruments and scaffolding necessary to execute the work in a first class manner, even such labor or materialswhich are not specifically mentioned in the project but are necessary for a satisfactory completion of the work.

The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that runs for floors or walls chases, holes to cut or left will be marked out atthe appropriate stage of the structural work.

The contractor shall undertake all modifications demanded by the Authorities in order to comply with current regulations, andproduce all certificates, if any, from the Authorities without extra charge.

3. Extent of Contractor’s DutiesAt commencement of the work, the contractor shall investigate and report to the Engineer if all materials and equipment to beused in the work, and not specified by others are available locally. If not available, the Contractor shall at this stage placeorders for the materials in question and copy the orders to the Engineer. Failure to do so shall in no way relieve the Contractorfrom supplying the specified materials and equipment in time

Materials supplied by others for installation and/or connection by the Contractor shall be carefully examined beforeinstallation and connection. All defects noted shall immediately be reported to the Engineer.

The contractor shall be responsible for verifying all dimensions relative to his work by actual measurements taken on the site.

After the completion of the work the contractor shall, on a set of drawing, indicated all alterations and/or modificationscarried out during the construction period.

4. Quality of Materials and Workmanship4.1 Material and workmanship Generally

All materials, equipment and accessories are to be new and regulations where such exist, or in their absence with the relevantBS.

2.23

Specifications 26

Uniformity of type of manufacture of equipment or accessories is to be preserved as far as practicable throughout thewhole work.

The contractor shall, if required by the Services Engineer, submit samples of materials to the Engineer for his approvalbefore placing an order.

If in these preambles the practice is adopted of specifying a particular item as “similar” to that of a particular firm’sproduct, it is to be clearly understood that this is to indicate the type and quality of the equipment required. No attempt isbeing made to give preferences to the equipment supplied by the firm whose name or products is quoted.

When particular manufacturers are specified herein, no alternative makes will be considered, and the Engineer shall beallowed to reject any other makes.

The Contractor will be entirely responsible for all materials, apparatus, equipment, etc, furnished by him in connectionwith his work, and shall take all special care to protect all parts of finished work from damage until handed over.The work shall be carried out by competent workmen under skilled supervision. The Services Engineer shall haveauthority to have any of the work taken down or changed, which is executed in an unsatisfactory manner.

4.2 Tubing GenerallyAll tubing exposed on faces of walls, unless otherwise specified, be fixed at least 25 mm clear of adjacent surfaces withapproved holder bats built into walls, cut and pinned to walls in cement mortar, where fixed to woodwork suitable clips shallbe used.

All tubing specified as fixed to ceilings, roof or roof structures, shall be fixed with approved mild steel hangers cut andpinned to ceilings, roof or roof structures. Where three or more tubes are fixed to ceilings, roofs or roof structure close toeach other, they shall be fixed in position, which leaves the lower surfaces at the same horizontal level, unless otherwisespecified.

Tubes shall be fixed to true lines, parallel to adjacent lines of the building unless otherwise specified.

Where insulated, tubing shall be fixed with the insulation at least 25 mm clear of adjacent surfaces.

Tube fixings and supports shall if nothing else is specified be arranged at intervals not greater than those given in thefollowing tables.

Mild Steel Tubing

Diameter of pipe in mm maximum spacing of fixing mm

Horizontal runs Vertical runs12 1 800 2 40019 1 400 3 00025 2 400 3 00032 2 700 3 00038 3 000 3 60050 3 000 3 60063 3 600 4 60076 3 600 4 600100 3 600 4 600

2.24

Specifications 27

Cast iron Pipes

Each support shall take its due proportions of the weight of the tube or pipe and shall allow free movement forexpansion and contraction.

All tubing specified as chased into walls shall have the wall face neatly cut and chased, the tubing wedged and fixed andplastered over.

Where tubing is laid in trench care shall be taken to ensure that fittings are not strained.

All framed bends shall be made so as too retain the full diameter of the pipe.

Sleeves shall be provided where tubes pass through walls and solid floors to allow movement of the tubes withoutdamage to the structure. The overall length of the sleeves shall be such that it projects at least 2 mm beyond the finishedthickness of the wall or partition.

Tubing shall be cut by hacksaws or other method, which does not reduce the diameter of the tube or form a bead orfeather, which might restrict the flow.

4.3 Galvanized Mild Steel Rainwater PipesGalvanized mild steel rainwater popes shall be in accordance with BS. 3868 with spigot and socket joints.

Joints shall be in accordance with BS 3868 with spigot and socket joints.

Joints shall be made with best quality tarred yarn, firmly caked to not more than one-third the depth of the socket and thejoint finished with molten lead properly caulked.

4.4. Galvanized Mild Steel TubingGalvanized mild steel tubing shall be in accordance with BS 1387:1957 with screwed and socketed joints

Fitting for the same shall be galvanized malleable iron to BS.1356: 1952 with threads to BS 21:1957.

Joints shall be made with find hemp and approved jointing compound or tape. Compound containing red lead must notbe used.

Long screws connectors and flat-faced unions shall not be used. Unless otherwise specified.

Where laid underground, galvanized mild steel tubing shall be protected with two coats “Flintkote” or two coats ofapproved bitumen. Minimum earth cover to underground tubing shall be 600mm.

The fixing of galvanized mild steel tubing shall be done by using:

Malleable iron “school board” pattern brackets for building in or for screwing too structure, or Malleable iron pipe rings; with either back plate, plug or girder clips, or Purpose made straps to the Engineer’s approval, or Other approved purpose made holder bats.

2.25

Diameter of pipe in mm maximum spacing of fixing in mm

Horizontal runs Vertical runsAll sizes 1 800 3 000

Specifications 28

4.5 Cast from PipesCast iron pipes and fittings for discharge and ventilating pipes shall be snad cast and spun iron spigot and socket pipes toBS. 416:1957, medium grade, and thoroughly coated inside and outside. Pipes and fittings shall be obtained from alicensed manufacturer and be embossed with the certification mark of approved standard institution.

Joints shall be made with best quality tarred yarn, firmly caulked to no more than one-third and depth of socket and thejoint finished with molten lead properly caulked.

Joints of cast iron discharge or ventilating pipes to stoneware drain pipes shall be made with tarred yarn and cement andsand mortar 1.3, joints to cast iron drain pipes shall be made with tarred yarn and molten lead properly caulked and jointsto pitch fiber pipes shall be made with approved adopters.

The fixing of cast iron pipes and fittings shall be done by using: -

4.6 Vertical RunsEars on the pipes socket plugged and screwed or nailed to the wall by means of approved screws or nails or cast ironmalleable iron or steel highed holder bats for building in or nailing or screwing to the wall.

4.7 Horizontal RunsMalleable iron or steel flat bats formed to two parts holder bats having the ring bolted together with 10mm bolts and with10 mm diameter mild steel rod welded one end to the ring and threaded the other end for and; including nut and washer forbolting to and including short lengths of mild steel channel or angle not less than 50x50 mm built into the structure orbolted thereto with self drilling anchor bolts, or

Purpose made straps to the Engineer’s approval. Where cast iron ventilating pipes passing through sloping roofs,necessary waterproofing by means of aluminum flashing well dressed down to the roof shall be provided.

Cash iron ventilating pipes passing through roofs shall terminate at least 300 mm above the roof level and shall beprotected against insect penetration by a copper wire mosquito-proof balloon grating securely bound on the top of the pipewith stout copper wire.

At the foot of all coast iron discharge and ventilating stacks and where shown on the drawings and on other positions asdirected or necessary for cleaning, inspection pipes with door shall be provided. On cast iron junctions inspection pipesshall be with large rectangular bolted door similar too “BURNBROS” No. 639.

5. Valves, Cocks, Taps etc.Draw-off taps and stop valves shall comply with BS 1010: 1959.

Copper-alloy gate valves shall comply with BS. 1953:1964.

Brass ball valves shall comply with BS 1212:1953 copper floats for ball valves shall comply with BS 1968:1953; andplastic floats for same shall comply with BS. 2456:1954.

Sluice valves shall comply with BS 1218:1946

Manually operated mixing valves for ablutionary and domestic purposes shall comply with BS. 2060:1964.

Draining taps shall comply with BS. 2879:1957

Copper-alloy screw down stop valves shall comply with BS. 2060:1964.

All valves and cocks shall have the same flow areas as the corresponding pipes and shall be accessible for operation andmaintenance and suitably labeled by an approved method.

2.26

Specifications 29

Stop valves shall be fixed in position shown on the drawings to all branch services for group control, or where elsespecified.

All valves, cokes and taps shall be of the correct pressure rating according to the recommendations of the relevance BS, orthe local authority. At commencement of the Contract, the contractor shall if necessary, ask the Engineer for guidance onthis point.

6. Sanitary and other AppliancesThe appliances shall be fixed in the positions shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall include in his rates for providing all necessary screws, bolts, etc, together with all jointing materialrequired and also for temporary erecting and securing fittings in the required position of service and discharge pipes,taking down, storing and fixing after completion of wall finishing permanently fixing and connecting to service anddischarge.

Care shall be taken at all times and particularly after fixing to protect appliances from damage.

Upon completion of the work, all appliances shall be cleaned for plaster, paint, etc and carefully examined for defects.

7. Steel Water Storage TanksWhere specified as galvanized mild steel, water storage tanks shall comply with BS 417:1964. Galvanizing shall takeplace after manufacture.

Pressed steel sectional water storage tanks shall comply with BS. 1564:1949 and shall be similar to manufacture“BRAITHWAITE”.

Where positioned on roof or storey partition slabs, tanks shall be placed on minimum 150mm high supports to theEngineer’s approval.

Water storage tanks shall be mosquito proofed by means of a well fitting bolted cover bedded on a thick gasket of felt orbitumen.

Overflow pipes from tanks shall discharge into open air or into floor gullies where nearby positioned, with splay cut endsmosquito proofed by means of wire gauze tightly bond on with stout galvanized wire.

8. Water MetersWater meters shall be installed by the Contractor in the positions shown on the drawings or where else instructed by theEngineer.

9. Fire Fighting EquipmentsPortable fire extinguishers shall comply with the following British standards:

a. Water type (soda Acid) BS. 138:1948

b. Foam type (chemicals) BS. 740:part 1:1948

c. Foam type (gas pressure) BS 749:part 2:9152

d. Water type (gas pressure) BS 1382:;1948

e. Carbon tetrachloride and chlorobrometnane BS 1721:1960

f. Carbon dioxide type BS 3709:1964

g. Dry powder type BS 3709:1964

h. Water type (stored pressure) BS 3709:1964

2.27

Specifications 30

fire hose couplings and ancillary equipment shall comply with BS 336:1965, rubber reel hose shall comply with BS4169:1959.

Underground fire hydrants and surface box openings for same shall comply with BS 750:1964.

The installation of hydrants and fire extinguishers shall be in accordance with C.P. 402:;101:1952 and CP, 402: part3:1964 respectively.

If nothing else is specified, fire extinguishers and hose reels shall be supplied in the color “fire red” and be similar tomanufacture “ANDUS”.

10. Testing

The whole of the water and discharge installations shall be tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the local authority.The contractor shall provide all necessary testing apparatus and facilities for testing the installation and any defective workshall be replaced immediately and shall be subject of retesting until found satisfactory.

Where pipes are to be chased into walls or otherwise concealed, the work shall be tested prior to lagging, making goodchases, etc.

All galvanized mild steel cold water pipes shall be tested to a cold-water pressure of 8.0kg/cm2. if nothing else isspecified.

The testing pressure shall be applied by means of a manually operated test pump or, in the case of long mains of largediameter, by power-driven test pump. Pressure gauges shall be recalibrated before the test.

The test pressure shall be maintained by the pump for about one hour and a leakage as specified in C.P. 30 section 502jshall be approved but any visible individual leak shall be repaired.

Valves, cocks and taps shall be absolutely tight under the test pressure for correspondence pipes as well as under asmall pressure.

All discharge pipes shall be tested with air or smoke to a pressure equal to 4mm water gauge and the pressure remainconstant for a period not less than 3 minutes. The water seals of all sanitary appliances, which are installed, shall be fullycharges and test plugs inserted into the opens ends of the Pipe works to be tested. With the pressure applied, every trapshall retain not less than 25mm seal. All tests shall be repeated three times: the traps being recharged before each test andthe maximum loss of seal in any one test, measured by a dip stick, should be taken as a significant result.

All test shall be carried out in the presence of a representative of the Local Authority and/or the Engineer or hisrepresentative.

Upon completion of work, including re-testing if necessary, the installation shall be thoroughly flushed out and waterpipes refilled with clean water ready for use.

2.28

Specifications 31

SECTION 9 – FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHING1. Sand

Sand for backings, floor and wall finishes is to comply with BS 1199 Table 1

2. AggregateCoarse aggregate is to be as described for “concrete work”

3. CementCement is to be as described for “concrete Work”

4. LimeLime is to be non-hydraulic hydrated line to BS 980 Class “A” obtained from an approved source and run into putty atleast 24 hours before use.

5. WorkmanshipAll concrete beds or slabs shall be thoroughly brushed clean, hacked if necessary and well wetted and flushed over withcement sand (1:1) grout immediately before screeds or pavings are laid.

Screed cement paying shall be laid in accordance with the relevant BS Code of Practice. Working joints between baysof the floor finish should be placed in accordance with the Engineer’s instructions. Paying shall be damp cured withsand or sawdust and kept damp for at least 7 days after laying.

All surfaces to be plastered or rendered must be brushed clean and well wetted before is applied. Joints of walling shallbe raked out and concrete hacked to form a key, care shall be taken to see that paving and plastering do not dry outprematurely.

Adequate time intervals must be left between successive coats in two-coat work in order that the drying shrinkage of theundercoat may be substantially complete. All internal and external angles shall be pencil rounded.

6. In-Situ paving generallyBefore laying in-situ floor finishes, the concrete beds are to be thoroughly hacked for key, cleaned off, thoroughlywetted with clean water and coated with stiff cement slurry and rates for screed, granolithic and terrazzo paving are toinclude for this. They are also to include for all necessary curing and protecting until the building is handed over to theEmployer.

7. Cement and Sand pavingThe cement and sand paving shall be in the proportions of 1:4 by volume and incorporating or treated with an approvedhardener.

8. Concrete pavingThe concrete paving shall be in the proportion of 1:1:4 by volume, the coarse aggregate used shall not exceed 10mmnominal size. It shall be trowelled smooth with a steel float. If the Contractor wishes to use a power float he is to seekthe approval of the Engineer who may require him to complete a sample area before granting permission.

9. Granolithic PavingThe aggregate for granolithic paving shall be in accordance with BS 1201 and shall be mixed in the proportions of1:1:11/2 cement, fine and coarse aggregate respectively. The mix shall incorporate an approved hardener suitable forincorporation and not for surface treatment. The water cement ration shall be kept as low as possible and shall not inany case exceed 0.45. The paving is not to be laid to the full thickness described and to be finished with a wood floatand no extra cement trowelled into the surface which is to be laid true and level. The paving is to be thoroughly curedafter laying by covering with polythene sheeting and periodically watered to keep it moist for at least one week afterlaying. The surface is to be polished with approved rotary carborundum discs mechanically operated coarse and finegrain and with cement and sand slurry to produce a blemish-free surface. Cost of granolithic paving should include foran approved colour plastic dividing strip.

2.29

Specifications 32

10. Terrazzo pavingThe in-situ terrazzo shall consist of white or colored cement and marble aggregate; the colour of the cement andaggregate shall be selected by the Architect. The mix shall comprise three parts of 6mm nominal aggregate to one partcolored cement by volume. The aggregate shall be clean and granular and shall not contain flaky particles or dust. Theunderbed shall be cement and sand 1:4 by volume. An approved plastic dividing strip shall be inserted.

The terrazzo toping shall be laid to a minimum of 12mm thickness in plastic conditions while the underbed is still greenand this should be watered to minimize absorption from the topping. The terrazzo must be well taped into position androlled with a suitable hand roller. The topping should be allowed to take an initial set and then any surface voids mustbe grouted up with damp sacking for at least 72 hours. When dry and hard, the surface shall be machine polished bygrinding with carborundum or tough stone disc of suitable grade and with rotary polishing pads.

11. Wood Block or parquet flooringParquet tile flooring shall be as manufactured by Timsales or other equal and approved manufacturer or supplier. It shallbe laid on a smooth screed and fixed with approved adhesive. It shall be finally sanded and finished with two coats ofapproved Two-pack epoxy wood varnish.

12. Floor screed for P.V.C TilesThe cement and sand paving shall be in proportion of 1:4 by volume and incorporating or treated with an approvedhardener.

13. P.V.C Tiles Flooring and SkirtingP.V.C floor tiles shall comply with BS 3260. The tiles and accessories shall be supplied in the size and thicknessspecified and in colours selected by the Architect and are to be fixed to the screed base with a suitable adhesive supplied(or recommended) by the manufacturer and used in accordance with his instructions.

14. Tyrolean RenderingTyrolean rendering is to be applied in four coats to obtain a total thickness of 22 mm and adequate time intervals must beallowed between successive coats in order that the drying shrinkage at each undercoat may be completed. The first coatshall consist of cement, lime putty and sand mixed in the proportions of 1:1:6 by volume applied to a minimum thicknessof 10mm and finished with a wood float finish. The second, third and fourth coats shall consist of one part of naturalcement to four parts of fine white chipping to approval applied with an approved “flicking machine” so that the first coat iscompletely covered and a thickness of 12 mm is obtained.

15. Internal PlasterInternal plaster to wall and ceiling shall be applied in two coats and adequate time intervals must be allowed betweensuccessive coats in order that the drying shrinkage of the undercoat may be substantially complete. The first coat must bewell scratched, keyed and wetted to receive the finishing coat. The finishing coat shall be finished smooth with a steelfloat but care must be taken not to overwork the surface in order to minimize the incidence of shrinkage cranks. Allinternal and external angles shall be pencil rounded.

Internal plaster, unless otherwise described, shall be lime plaster of 15 mm minimum overall finished thickness applied intwo coats, the first coat consisting of cement, lime putty and sand mixed in the proportions of 1:2:9. The finishing coatshall be a skim coat comprising cement and lime putty in the proportions of 1:10

Cement plaster is to be employed where specified on the drawings and is to be applied into coats of approximatelyequally thickness to a total of 15mm minimum overall finished thickness. The composition of both coats shall be the sameand shall comprise cement and sand (1:4) but a small percentage addition (not more than 10%) lime putty may bepermitted if the Architect considers that this will reduce the incidence of shrinkage.

2.30

Specifications 33

The Contractors shall cut out and make good cracks, blisters and other defects and leave the whole of the plastering andrendering perfect at completion. When making good defects the plaster shall be cut out to a rectangular shape with edgesundercut to form dovetailed key, and all finished flush with the face of surrounding plaster.

16. Glazed Ceramic tiles16.1 Glazed wall tiles shall be from an approved manufacturer and shall conform to the requirements of BS 1281. Tiles shall be

white with slightly rounded or “cushion” edges and unless otherwise specifically described shall be size 200x300x 6mmthick. Tiles shall be laid with continuous straight joints and internal angles shall be butt jointed. Rounded on edge tilesshall be used at all external angles and at edges of panels. Tiles shall be bedded in approved tile adhesive and pointed inwhite cement.

16.2 Glazed floor tiles shall be from Saj Ceramics or other equal and approved manufacturer and unless otherwise specificallydescribed shall be size 300x300x 8mm thick. Backing to tiles is to be cement and sand in the proportion of 1:4 rendering inone coat to a minimum thickness of 25mm finished with wood float.

16.3 Backing for wall tiles is to be cement and sand in the proportion of 1:4 rendering in one coat to a minimum thickness of12mm with wood float finish.

2.31

Specifications 34

SECTION 10 – GLAZING

1. GlassGlass generally shall comply with the requirements of BS 952 and shall be free from bubbles, specks, waves, flows orany other defects.

Clear sheet glass shall be 32 oz. (4mm nominal thickness) flat drawn sheet of ordinary glazing quality unless otherwisedescribed.

Polished plate glass shall be 6 mm thickness.

Glass for louver blades shall be clear sheet flat drawn or rough cast obscure rolled glass to the thickness shown in thedrawings with all exposed edges ground and polished.

2. PuttyThe putty shall be hard-setting tropical putty to BS 544

3. WorkmanshipAll glass is to be accurately cut to fit easily into rebates with a tolerance of 2mm all round. It is to be well puttied at theback and to be sprigged with non-ferrous pins. The putty is to be mostly trimmed and cleaned off and care must be takenthat it does not show beyond the sight lines of the sashes. All rebates must be treated with one coat lacquer (as describedunder “painting” hereafter) prior to glazing.

4. Cleaning and ProtectingThe Contractor must allow in his rates for the protection of all work in this section and for replacing any cracked,scratched, broken or defective glass prior to handing over to the employer. He must also allow for cleaning all thewindows inside and out and other glass on completion with an approved window cleaner and wash-leather and for removalof all paint splashes.

2.3

Specifications 35

SECTION 11 – PAINTING

1. Colour RangeAll painting shall be carried out in colours selected by the Architect.

2. MaterialsPaint generally shall be ready mixed and supplied by one of the manufacturers listed below and delivered to the site inthe sealed containers clearly labeled with the manufacturer’s name, type of paint and colour. Oil based priming paintshall comply with BS. 2521 – 2524 inclusive.

Crown Paints Basco Paints (K) Ltd Sadolin Paints

Paints are to be used strictly in accordance with the manufacture’s name, instructions, type of paint and colour. Oilbased priming paint shall comply with BS. 2521 – 2524 inclusive.

3. PreparationAll surfaces to receive treatment are to be clean and dry before paint application and surface irregularities are to beremoved by filling or the use of suitable abrasives.

4. Plastered SurfacesInternal plastered wall surfaces generally to be treated with plastic emulsion paint, surface are to be allowed to dry outthoroughly prior to paint application. All cracks and surface imperfections are to be cut back and filled with a patentfiller in accordance with he manufacturer’s instructions and rubbed down to a true and even surface.

Apply one primer coat thinned with water and two finishing coats of “Crown Paints” or other approved plastic emulsionpaint in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. When specified internal plastered wall surface are to bepainted gloss. In addition to the preparation described above, apply one coat of an approved alkali-resistant primer andflat down with 320 grade “wet dry” abrasive paper. Apply two finishing coats of approved gloss paint lightly rubbeddown in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

5. Woodwork PreparationLarge knots in woodwork are to be cut back and replaced with sound wood or scorched back and after priming thesurface made good with stopping. All knots are to be treated with two thin coats and patent knotting free from resin,after priming all nail boles and other imperfections shall be filled with stopping and the whole surface rubbed down to asmooth even surface. The stopping must be “Sadofil” or other approved filler.

6. Metal WorkAll rust and loose scale on steel and iron work must be removed by wire brushing and rubbing with emery and treatedwith one coat of red oxide primer or other zinc paint in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. One coat ofzinc chromate primer will then be applied followed by two undercoats and one finishing coat of gloss paint as describedfor woodwork above. The Contractor is to note that where mild steel burglar bars are housed into wood frames the fulllength of the bar is to be treated before fixing.

Galvanized metalwork is to receive one coat of white spirit or mordant de-greasing solution washed off prior to theapplication of calcium plummet primer followed by two undercoats and one finishing coat of gloss as previouslydescribed.

Galvanized metalwork is to be painted only where instructions are given by the Architect as in some cases galvanizedmetalwork is to be left untreated.

2.33

Specifications 36

SECTION 12 – ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

1. General Conditions and Requirements1.01 Working Drawing

The Contract Drawing are detailed preliminary drawings whose purpose is to establish the requirements and scope ofthe Electrical Works and allow tenderers to prepare their tenders. They are not intended to be working Drawings andmust not be used as such.

The Contractor shall prepare all such Working Drawings. The Working Drawings shall be complete in such detailthat the Electrical Works can be executed on site and that the Engineer can approve the Contractor’s design andintentions in the execution of the Electrical Works.

If the Contractor requires any further instructions, details, contract Drawing or information drawings to suchinformation as may be required in writing to the Engineer.

All working Drawing shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The Engineer reserves the right to reject anywork commenced prior to such approval.

Working Drawings to be prepared by the Contractor shall include but not be restricted to the following.a. Any drawings required by the Contractor and the Engineer to enable structural provisions to be made. They

shall include detailing of holes, chases, fixings, foundations, cable work ducting whether below oraboveground, in or outside or below buildings.

b. General arrangement drawings of all plant, control panels switch and distribution boards, fittings andapparatus any part thereof and installation layout arrangements of such plant and apparatus.

c. Layout drawings of all concealed and surface ducts and conduits, showing cables and wires concealed.d. Detail and arrangement drawings for any alternative equipment approved by the Engineer.e. Such other drawings as are called for in the text of the Specifications or schedules or as the Engineer may

reasonably require.

Two copies of all working Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Two copies of approvedworking Drawings shall be submitted as soon as possible thereafter. There shall be no deviation from approvedworking Drawings without the Engineer’s written permission. The working Drawing shall be based upon the metr5icsystem i.e. M(meters) and/or mm (millimeters). Approval by the Engineer of workingDrawing shall neither relieve the Contractor of any of this obligations under the Contract or relieve him of correctingany errors found subsequently in the approved working drawings or other working Drawings and in the work on siteor elsewhere associated therewith.

Record DrawingsDuring the execution of the works on site the Contractor shall, in a manner proved by the Engineer, record onWorking Drawings and Contract Drawings all information necessary for preparing Record Drawings of the installedElectrical Works. Marked-up drawings and other documents shall be available to the Engineer as he may require forinspection and checking.

Record Drawing may include approved Drawing adjusted as a correct record of the installation of the Contractworks, subject to the approval of the Engineer.

2.34

Specifications 37

They shall include but not restricted to the following drawings or information;

a. Working Drawing and contract Drawing amended as necessary but titled “Record Drawing” and certifiedas a true record of the “as installed” electrical works. Subject to the approval of the Engineer such workingdrawings as may be inappropriate may be omitted.

b. Fully dimensioned drawings of all plant and apparatus installed or connected by the Contractor.

c. General arrangement drawings of equipment, other areas containing plant forming part of the ElectricalWorks and the like, including the accurate size and location of plant and apparatus suitably cross-referredthe drawings mentioned in (b) above and herein after

d. Routes, types, sizes and arrangement of all electric ca les, conduits, ducts and wiring including the date ofinstallation of concealed work.

e. Schematic diagrams of individual plant, apparatus, and also those applicable to system operation as a whole.

f. Wiring diagrams of plant and apparatus.

The Contractor shall supply for fixing in sub-stations, switch rooms, boiler houses, plant rooms, pump houses, theoffice of the Maintenance Engineer and similar places such suitable instruction charts, schematic diagrams ofinstrumentation and of the electrical regulations as may be requested by the Engineer provided that the said charts,diagrams etc, relate to installations forming part of the Electrical Work. All such charts and diagrams shall be ofsuitable plastic materials on a stiff backing and must be approved by the Engineer before final printing.

Market-up drawing of the installation of the Electrical Works shall be kept up to date and completed by the date ofpractical or sectional completion.

Market-up drawings of the installation of the installation of the Electrical works shall be kept up to date andcompleted any the date of practical or sectional completion.

Two copies of the Record Drawings of the Electrical Works and two sets of the installation charts and schematicdiagrams on stiff backing shall be provided not more than one month later. The Engineer reserves his right of reviewthe marked-up drawings to see if they are in an up to date condition before approving the Contractor’s requests forinterim payments.

Record Drawing shall be prepared on approved transparent linen or plastic material suitable for reproduction by theDye line process or similar.

If the Contractor fails to produce to the Engineer’s approval either (a) the market-up drawing during the execution ofthe Electrical Works or (b) the record Drawings etc, within one month of sectional or practical completion theEngineer shall be at liberty to have these drawings produced by others. The cost of obtaining the necessaryinformation and preparing such drawings etc will be deducted from the outstanding payments due to the Contractor.

For preparation of Working and Record Drawings the Contractor will be supplied with prints of Contract Drawingsand Architect Drawings where required.

SamplesSamples are physical examples furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials, equipment and workmanship, and toestablish standards by which the Works will be judged. Wherever required in the Particular Specification theContractor shall submit samples in adequate time so that no delay is caused, and he shall include in his tender pricefor all; such samples and subsequent amending of same if the Engineer finds it necessary in order to attain the requiredstandard of workmanship or materials.

2.35

Specifications 38

The Engineer will review and approve samples with reasonable promptness so that no delay is caused, but onlyconformity with the design concept of the works and with the information given in the Electrical Contract Documents.The Engineer’s approval of a separate item shall not indicate approval of an assembly in which the item functions.

1.04 Maintenance manualsUpon practical completion of the Electrical Works the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer four copes of amaintenance Manual relating to any equipment or plant forming part of the Electrical Work.

The Manual shall be loose-leaf type, internal A4 size with stiff covers. It may have in several volumes and must besub-divided into sections, each section covering one engineering service system. It shall have ready means ofreference and a detailed index.

The Manual shall contain full operating and maintenance instructions for each item of equipment, plant and apparatusset up in a way dealing systematically with each system. It shall include as may be applicable to the Electrical Worksthe following and any other items listed in the text of this specification or the Particular Specification.

a. System Descriptionb. Plantc. Valve operationd. Switch operatione. Procedure of fault findingf. Emergency proceduresg. Lubrication requirementsh. Maintenance and servicing periods and proceduresi. Colour Coding legend for all Servicesj. Schematic and Wiring Diagrams of plant, apparatus and Switchgeark. Record Drawing, true to scale, reduced to international A4 sizel. Lists of primary and secondary spares.

The Manual shall be specially prepared for the Electrical Works, and manufacturer’s standard descriptive literatureand plant-operating instruction (cares) will not be accepted for inclusion unless exceptionally approved by theEngineer.

The Contractor shall however, affix such cards, if suitable, adjacent and apparatus. One spare set of all such shall befurnished to the Engineer.

Co-operationThe contractor shall carry out his work in accordance with the working programme.

The Contractor shall co-operate with the Engineer in planning the installation before work is commenced.

Particular care shall be taken to ensure that there is close co-operation with the other sub-Contractors in stallingservices to prevent fouling of services positions, cable routes, switch positions, access positions etc.

The Contract Drawings give a general indication of the intended layout. The positions of the equipment andappliances and also the exact routes of the mains and distribution conduits, trucking, cables, etc shall be shown onWorking Drawing and approved by the Engineer before installation is commenced.

When large items of equipment such as switchboards, trunking or ling lengths of conduit ate to be installed or cableto be stretched out before drawing in, the Contractor shall provide, in adequate time, access for installation when workis commenced on site.

2.36

Specifications 39

The contractor shall make sure the correctness of connections he is making to all items of equipment suppliedunder this and other contracts before they are put into operation. Details of operation, temperature, voltage, power,rating, etc shall be confirmed to others and confirmation received before the system is first operated.

Cutting away and Making GoodAll away and all making good will be carried out by the Contractor and he will be responsible for the correct makingout of all chases and holes.

The contractor will be responsible for the provision of all cable ducts and trenches unless anything else is stated inthe Particular specification or marked on the Contract Drawing.

The Contractor shall include in his tender for the plugging of all walls, ceiling and floors to facilitate the fixing ofthe conduits, accessories and all other parts of the electrical installations. Any purpose-made fixing brackets shallalso be provided and installed by the Contractors.

The Contractor shall also be responsible for ensuring that runs for floor or wall, chases, holes to be cut or left aremarked out at an appropriate stage of the structural works. All wall chases shall be perpendicular or horizontal to thefinished floor level, angled chases will not be permitted, but for exceptional circumstances.

The contractor shall at the earliest opportunity set out the position of all holes necessary for the passage of ducts andconduits or otherwise required in connection with his work.

The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the fixing and alignment of switches, socket outlets, telephone outletsand similar boxes.

1.07 Structural Provision for the electrical WorkPreliminary major structural provision has been made for the Electrical /works on outline information ascertainedensuring the preparation of the Electrical Contractor sates otherwise when submitting his tender.

Any minor structural provisions or alternations to major structural provisions required by the contractor shall beshown on working drawings to the Engineer within 30days of the date of award of the Electrical Contract.

No request for alterations to preliminary major structural provisions will be approved except where they areconsidered unavoidable by the Engineer. They will in no case approved if building work is so far advances that theywill cause additional costs or delays in the work.

Concealed WorkThe Contractor will be responsible for the extra runs and placing of conduits and boxes; which are to be cast inconcrete ceiling, floors, walls, columns and beams, and for the proper fixing of the conduits and boxes the shutteringand the steel reinforcement work.

During the procedure of casting the Contractor must provide a labor to attend the work and if necessary to be readyto make good any damage on the Contractor’s work caused by laborer when casting.

When conduit are concealed, the boxes shall be in a exact position relative to the finished plaster of such other finishas may be applied to enable cover plates to be accurately positioned. The contractor shall, if required, indicatesuitable catum points from which all measurements can be taken. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensureaccuracy of fixing.

Position of Service, Equipment’s, Fittings and ApparatusThe contractor shall be responsible for verifying all dimensions relative to his work by actual measurements taken onSite.

2.37

Specifications 40

The routes of service and approximate positions of apparatus ate shown on the Contract Drawing but their exactpositions shall be determined by approved dimensional details on Working Drawing or on site by the Engineer inConsultation with the Contractor.

The Contractor shall ascertain on site that his work will not foul other services and in all cases the services through theducts must be arranged to allow maximum access for maintenance and repair. Any work which has to be carried outtwice due to negligence in this respect will be his responsibility.

The contractor will be deemed to have allowed in his Tender for locating terminal points for services (eg. lightingswitches, socket outlets, lighting points) in the correct positions. The contractor sold refers to the particularspecification for exact mounting distance and heights.

1.10 Identification of Plant and ComponentsAll main switches, circuit breakers, isolators, switch fuses, control panel, switch – and distribution board shall beneatly and clearly labeled externally with identification marks corresponding with those on drawings or inspecifications.

Details of the lettering of the labels and the method of mounting or supporting shall be approved by the Engineerprior to manufacturer.

1.11 PaintingUnless anything else is stated in the specifications, the Contractor must include in his tender for all protective andfinish painting of the Electrical works including colour of service pipe work to the approval of the Engineer. Specialrequirements, if any, are specified in the text of the particular Specification. The painting shall be carried out by askilled painter.

1.12 Supply by othersThe installation only of materials and equipment from a supplier having a direct agreement with the Employer shallmean the taking delivery where directed, checking with invoices, idents or other delivery documents, reporting andclaiming damages for shortages and damaged goods, defraying demurrage, signing for as having been received ingood order, transporting to and around on site, unloading, storing, covering and protecting until the time of fixingreplacing anything lost or damaged, unpacking, sorting, assembling, hoisting to required levels and installing asrequired.

1.13 PaymentsThe contractor will be paid in accordance with the terms of the Contract. No payments shall be due under the

contract unless the quantity Surveyor has included in; a certificate the; amount covering that part of the ElectricalWorks for which payment is due.

The percentage of certified value retained shall be 10% unless otherwise specified; in the Bill of Quantities for theContract.

No certificate so issued by the Quantity Surveyor shall be considered conclusive evidence of the sufficiency of anywork or materials to which it relates so as to relieve the Contractor from his liability to execute the works in allrespects in accordance with the terms of and subject to the conditions of this and the particular Specification, or fromliability to make good all defects as provided thereby.

1.14 InspectionThe Engineer shall have full rights t inspect the work in progress and all materials and equipment for use in theinstillation prior to its erection whether these are on site or in the Contractor’s workshop.

The Contractor shall allow for all reasonable access to the works for this purpose, as well as the provision of necessarylaborer, scaffolding, etc.

2.38

Specifications 41

1.15 CleaningThe site shall be kept clean and tidy at all times and all litter removed regularly.

1.16 TestingAll tests required by B.S the Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings and the license shall be carried out bythe Contractor.

Tests on insulation and earth continuity mentioned in the above rules and Regulations shall be carried out by theContractor on the completed installation, as well as all running tests for insulation, continuity of all conduit and trunkingsystems and earth connections.

The Contractor will be required to gee all completion forms etc, to enable the installation to be tested upon completion;similarly a reasonable notice should be given to thee Supply Company of the period of completion to avoid delay of suchtests (essential before handling the installation over to the Employer). The Contractor shall pay all fees arising from thetesting and any subsequent re-testing of the installation.

All tests must be carried out in the presence of the Engineer or such other person appointed for this purpose, but theContractor alone will be responsible to the authorities for the installation’s compliance with rules and Regulations.

The Contractor shall provide precise instruments and all labour for testing. Test results shall be submitted the Engineerwithin fourteen days of the contract and the Contractor shall issue the /Certificate upon completion as required under theabove referred regulations.

Any defects, faults or omissions of the installations that might be apparent by such tests shall be corrected by thecontractor at his own expense.

1.16 Tools and Testing EquipmentWhen required in the Particular Specification the Contractor shall in separate boxes provide sets of special tools, generaland special testing equipment required for normal maintenance serving of items of plant and major apparatus forming partof the Electrical Work.

The boxes shall be clearly marked inside as to which item of plant or apparatus the contents relate.

All special tools and testing equipment may be used by the Contractor in the execution of the Electrical Works but will notbe accepted as part of the Electrical works by the Employer unless they are handed over in clean and undamaged conditionand in perfect working order.

A schedule of boxes and items therein shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval.

Boxes shall be of such sizes that they may be conveniently carried by not more than two men and are capable of beingsuitably and consistently stored in a central store.

1.18 Hand Over Completed InstallationThe Electrical Works shall be considered complete and the maintenance and defects liability period shall commence onlywhen the Electrical Works and Supporting services have been tested, commissioned and operated to the satisfaction of theEngineer and approved and accepted by the Employer, provided always that the handing over of the Electrical Works shallcoincide with the completion of the Main Contract Works.

The following procedure will apply:

1) Upon completion of the Electrical Woks to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Contractor will make a request tothe Engineer to hand over the installation.

2) The Engineer will arrange a visit or series of visits on site to satisfy all parties of the correctness of the installationso that the client can accept the installation from the Contractor.

2.39

Specifications 42

3) The Contractor must demonstrate to the employer every service connected and instruct the Employer’s operatingstaff as to its efficient and safe use and to explain fully all-electrical drawings.

4) The Contractor will prepare Approved Hand Over Certificates and check lists of all controls and items ofequipments, tools, spares etc.

5) Copies of all Hand Over documents should be handed to the Engineer, which will signify the start of the defectsliability period.

2. Quantity of materials and Workmanship

2.01 Materials and Workmanship GenerallyAll materials, fittings and accessories shall be new as specified and in accordance with the requirements of the currentrules and Regulations where such exist and with the relevant British Standards.

Uniformity of manufacture and type of fittings and accessories shall be preserved as far as practicable throughout theElectrical works.

The Contractor shall, if required, submit samples of materials to the Engineer for his approval before placing an order.

Wherever in the Contract Documents the practice is adopted of specifying a particular item as “similar to” or “as” thatlisted in a particular manufacture’s catalogue, it is to be clearly understood that this is to indicate the type and qualityof the equipment required. No attempt is being made to give preference to the equipment supplied by themanufacturer whose catalogue is quoted. The onus of proof as to equivalent quality will rest with the Contractorwho’s tender to allow for the makes described.

Where particular manufactures are specified herein no alternative makes will be considered without weighty reasonsand the Engineer shall be at liberty to reject any other makes.

The contractor will be entirely responsible for all materials, apparatus, equipment, etc furnished by him in connectionwith the Electrical Works and shall take all special care to protect all parts of finished work from damage until it ishanded over to the Employer.

The work shall be carried out omnipotent workman under skilled supervision. The Engineer shall have the authorityto have any part of the work, which is executed in an unsatisfactory manner, removed and replaced.

2.02 FixingAll apparatus and accessories shall be rigidly fixed in position by means of correct number and size of fixing bolts,screws, etc as prescribed by the manufacturer of the apparatus. Flush boxes fort switches, socket outlets, and similaraccessories shall be fixed in the wall with a wood screw of appropriate length.

Conduit boxes to support, lighting, fitting or other equipment, shall be screwed to the ceiling or wall in addition to thesupport offered by the conduits.

Raw plugs or similar shall be used fixing smaller equipment to walls or ceilings. For large equipment raw bolts orsimilar shall be used.

2.03 EarthlingThe Contractor shall earth the entire installation in accordance with the regulations and the license’s bylaws. Theentire system of metallic conducts and trunking, metallic sheaths of cables, cases and enclosures of Switchgear andelectrical apparatus shall be connected to the earth point according to the current rules and Regulations.The Contractor shall supply and install conductors, cables, copper tapes, earthling rods, etc for the installation of thecomplete earthling system.

2.40

Specifications 43

2.04 Wiring in ConductsAll wiring must be carried out in PVC insulate single core copper cables to the relevant British Standard.

The wiring shall be carried out by looping cables from point. Where tee-offs or other joints of conduits required, aproper draw-box shall be provided. The entire wiring shall be so organized that later changes and renewal can takeplace without cutting down structural parts or removing the fabric of the building. The Contractor must allow in histender for sufficient fixing of all wiring items.

The wiring shall comply with the colour code requirements of the relevant authorities.

All cables shall draw in after the installation of the entire conduit system and after plaster has dried out. Draw wiresshall not thread in at the time conduits being installed.

Not more than 6 final Sub-circuit cables shall run in conduits feeding outlet boxes. Not more than 8 cables runningstraight back to the distribution board shall be enclosed in one conduit.

Sub-mains shall not be enclosed in the same conduit as other circuits.

Lighting sub-circuits shall not be enclosed in the same conduit as general-purpose power sub-circuits.

Single-phase sub-circuits shall not be enclosed in the same conduits as three phase sub-circuits.

Extra low voltage services shall be run n separate conduits systems. A dedicated conduit system for each service shallbe provided.

Great care shall be taken to ensure that no twisted cables enter the conduits.

2.05 Cables and ConductorsAll cables shall be with copper cores unless otherwise specified.

All cables shall be delivered to the site in their original packing with all seals intact.

Cables dimensions shall comply with Regulations and with the information given on the drawings of thespecifications.

All cables shall confirm the relevant British Standard. No cable dimensions smaller than 1.5sq mm shall be used forlight and control circuits.

No flexible cords smaller than 0.75 must be used. The appropriate jointing paste is to be used where aluminumconductors are connected to copper or brass elements in switchboards etc, to avoid dissimilar metal chemical action.

Cables in horizontal and vertical runs shall be clamped in such a way that stresses in the cables are avoided.

Where no trays or trunking is installed the cables shall be fixed to structures by means of screw fixed saddles.

Common saddled shall be used where cables are grouped. All cables shall be terminated with suitable compressiontype cable glands of the correct size.

All low voltage cables shall be thoroughly soldered or joined wit reliable connectors, which hold the conductors in afirm grip without damaging the wire and without any possibility of vibrating loose.Mineral insulated cables shall be of 440-volt grade unless otherwise specified. Where specified or where installed incorrosive situations they shall be sheathed with PVC sleeves.

2.41

Specifications 44

The greatest care shall be taken when terminating mineral insulated cables and insulation tests shall be taken 24 hoursafter a cable has been sealed.

Mineral insulated cables shall, where no cable trays exist, be fixed copper clips of an approved design maximum 35cm centers on vertical runs and maximum 25 cm centers on horizontal runs.

Through joints will only be allowed at runs exceeding the length to which cables can be manufactured.

Sealing of mineral insulated cable ends shall be by means of cold screw-on type seals and universal glands of samemanufacture as thee cable.

Where PVC insulates steel wire armored cables enter switchgear and other apparatus they shall be made off withsuitable brass glands in corporation in cone grip armor clamps, as approved for use b the cable manufactures, with thewhole gland enclose in a PVC shroud.

At all points of cable termination, a reasonable excess length of cable shall be included to allow for future alteration.

Any exposed conductor or cable end shall be taped with PVC tape to thee thickness of the original insulation. thetaping shall be of the same colour as the original insulation.

Cables rising from the floor in exposed positions shall have some form of kicking protection for approximately 1 mabove floor level. This may be either short length or bushed conduct, or metal channel, and the top end shall besealed with plastic compound.

Cables shall be taken off drums with the drum supported on a spindle and cable drum jacks. Where feeding cables intohorizontal routes the cables shall be run the underside of the drum, where feeding to a manhole. Cable shall be run offthe top of the drum.

Care must be taken to break the rotation of the drum preventing cable turns on the drum form running loose.

Cables shall not be dragged over ground, concrete or other surfaces, but must be either adequately suppo9rted onrollers and/or man handled into position. Any damage to the serving or sheathing of cables shall be brought to theEngineer’s notice in writing and his instructions that it shall be repaired or replaced is to be carried out.

2.06 ConduitsPlastic conduit shall be of best quality new super high impact grade, heavy gauge, complying with BS 4607, (RigidPVC plasticised conduit as manufactures by EA cables ltd) suitable for plain connections. Conduits badly formed orbent or damaged in any way must not be used.

All PVC conduit connections shall be made using plain bore couplings and special waterproof adhesive for use by theconduit manufacturers. Bends shall be made using either correct size binding springs or rubber cords. Earth continuityshall be maintained by running a suitably sized tinned copper conductor inside the tubing. Connections to boxes, etcshall be down with brass nuts, bolts and washers.

Conduits not cat in or concealed shall be galvanized conduits of heavy gauge welded and screwed steel and shallcomply with BS 4568.

The exposed threads and damaged or corroded surface of any type of steel conduit shall be cleaned and then treatedwith two coats of zinc rich paint (Zinc content 92-95 percent) all according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Onesuch paint is “Galvanized SB”, Expedite ltd.All joints shall be screwed up tight and all conduit ends cut square with all burrs and roughness removed.

Conduits having a diameter of less than 20 mm shall not be used in the Electrical Works.

2.42

Specifications 45

Conduits to be concealed in structures cast in situ shall bee secured to the steel reinforcement with heave bindingwire, spaced not than 900 mm apart to prevent movement of the conduit and boxes during the pouring and vibrating ofthe concrete.

Boxes shall be filled with paper to prevent ingress of concrete, and all boxes shall be securely fixed to the shutteringwith nails or other measures, which must not be visible after removal of the shuttering unless they later can beconcealed e.g. by plaster. Conduits shall be installed after the first grid of steel reinforcement has been securely fixed.All open ends of conduits shall be protected by couplings plugged with a suitable non-metallic stopping plug.

Conduits run in chases in walls of the like shall be fixed by means of mild steel pipe hooks or saddles spaced not morethan 900 mm apart. Where the conduit is concealed behind plaster it shall be sunk to a dept of 10 mm below finishedplaster level before application of the plaster, i.e. thickness of plaster shall not be less than 10 mm when coveringconduits. Conduits fixed to the surfaces of walls or ceilings shall be fixed by spaced bar saddles fixed by spaced barsaddles fixed not more than 900 mm apart.

Surface conduits shall also be fixed 200 mm from boxes, the boxed themselves being securely fixed. Where such andarrangement of boxes and saddles would prove both unsightly and unnecessary, short lengths of conduit not exceeding900 mm between boxes need not be secured further than by connection to the adjacent boxes. In such cases theEngineer reserves his rights to insist upon having additional fixings provided should he for any reason whatsoeverconsider additional fixing necessary.

Special care shall be taken to prevent dirt and plaster to enter any section of the conduit system.

All bends in conduits shall be formed without any decrease or increase of the cross-sectional diameter of the conduits.The radius of the bend shall not be less than indicated by the Regulations. For concealed work this radius shall beincreased. No manufactured tees, elbows and bends will be permitted in concealed work. All conduits shall bethoroughly cleaned for sharp edges and burrs removed.

The conduits shall be installed unnecessary bends or changes in direction. Conduits shall be laid in straight lines.Where straight rows of conduit are, installed, inspection boxes shall be placed at not more than 15 intervals. Theyshall be not more than 4 easy bends or 2 right angle bends between boxes.

In surface conduct system inspection bends may, where it seems convenient, replace inspection boxes, but only withpermission form the Engineer.

Cables capacities of conduit and trunking shall be in strict accordance with the current IIEE wiring Regulations (ref15th …, appx.12)

Where particular installations are called for which fall outside these tables, then a space factor of 50% should be used.

2.07 BoxesConduits boxes installed concealed in connection with plastic conduits shall be of plastic.

Boxes installed externally shall be galvanized and where exposed to direct weather conditions compound filled.

All metal boxes shall be fitted with an earth terminal.

Deep boxes or extension rings on standard circular boxes shall be used where necessary in order to bring the front ofeach box flush with the ceiling or wall.

All screws for holding boxes, lids etc in position shall be screwed in. Adaptable boxes shall be screwed by minimumfour screws. Conducts shall enter such boxes by means of conduit sockets. Joint boxes without connectors will not beallowed.

2.43

Specifications 46

All boxes shall match the equipment installed in the box and preferably genuine parts produced by the samemanufacturer shall be used.

All necessary screws, plugs, bolts and other fixings for electrical equipment must be supplied by one Contractor andincluded in his tender. All fixing on concrete or stone structure shall be by means of raw plugs or similar plugs inplastic.

All spare ways in boxes left for possible future extension shall be fitted with stopping plugs

2.08 Trunking and Cable TraysThe maximum number of cables in trunking shall be that which theoretically would occupy 50% of the cross sectionalarea of the trunking. If else is specified the metal trunking shall be similar to that manufactured by “Walsall”. Allsections shall be rigidly fixed together and fixed to buildings structure at intervals of not more than 1200mm. all metaltrunking shall be made electrically continuous with copper links across each joint.

The trunking shall be standard wall or sectional type, and shall have a removal cover, which shall be accessiblethroughout the entire length of the installation. Covers shall be fixed to the trunking with screw or similar devices,which shall be captive within the cover plate. All steel trunking shall be hot galvanized. Further surface treatment totrunking shall be in accordance with the particular specification.

Cable trays shall be manufactured of perforated hot galvanized steel plate with returned flanges. Suspensions shall beat intervals of not more than 1500 mm.All supports and fittings shall be of the same finish as the tray.

2.08 SwitchboardTender prices must include the supply of all switchboards and distribution boards where not otherwise stated. Allcosts for installation in the position indicated on drawings and the cleaning and connection of all in and outgoingcables to the correct terminals must be included in the tender.

Each switchboard section shall be completed, fully wired and checked out at the factory or workshop and shall requirea minimum of installation work on the site. Modular construction shall be used wherever practicable and provisionshall be made for simplified servicing, replacement and maintenance without major dismantling.

All switches, switch fuses, circuit breakers, etc shall be numbered in agreement with the Engineer with engravedplastic labels.

Were space on switchboard s is provided for future components to be installed as shown on the drawings, all auxiliaryparts shall be provided and installed so that future components may be installed and connected with the least possibleinconvenience. Full safety measures shall be provided with all such spaces.

The tender shall include any provision, which may be required, for the installation of the licensee’s meteringequipment.

Switchboards and distribution boards shall be dust proof, IP54, if nothing else is stated. They shall have a flexibilityof arrangement so that future extensions are possible. Switch fuses shall be so installed that when front cover areremoved all incoming and outgoing connections are easily accessible from the front. Neutral and earthing bars shallbe provided with each panel in the full length of the panel having connectors equivalent to the number of switches.

The arrangements shall be so that complete switches may be disconnected and withdrawn without too extensive work.All busbars and busbar connections shall be clearly marked with colors according to the passes; red, yellow, blue andthe neutral black. The busbars shall be orderly arranged in the panel and furthermore so that extensions to both sidesmay be made in the future.

2.44

Specifications 47

Removable insulated shields shall be provided for protection against contact with live parts. All panels arrangementsshall be of sufficient mechanical strength to with stand the influences of short-circuit currents.

All wiring within each switchboard shall be orderly laced and bonded to the panel structure, the wiring insulationbeing colored according to the above busbar colour scheme.

Where wiring passes through holes in metalwork protection by rubber bushes shall be provided.

Where single core cables are used care shall be taken to prevent inductive eddy currents.

Conduits and cable entries shall be provided at the top and the bottom of all equipment.

Where wiring is installed to panels, which are supplied and installed by others, the cables shall bebrought into thepanel and sufficient length left to permit the making off and connection by others to the terminals. Similarly wherewhich is installed by others to a panel supplied under this contract, the final connection of the cables to the terminalsshall be carried out as part of his contract.

Each panel shall be fitted internally with circuit lists and a schematic drawing the distribution system, mounted on aplastic covered frame.

2.09 SwitchgearControl voltage of all contractors, automatic switchgear and motor protection gear shall be 240 V A C if nototherwise specified. The short circuit capacity of all circuit breakers, switchgear and motor control gear shall be inaccordance with the Regulations.

All fused switch units shall be supplied and installed complete with Class Q H R C cartridge fuse links complyingwith B S 88, and shall be contained in metal clad, dust proof, gasket sealed individual enclosure with non-detachable steel operating handles which shall be capable of being locked in either the “on” or the “off” position.

The fused switch units shall have fault ratings at least equal to the fault rating of the switchboard in which they areinstalled.

2.10 Switches, socket Outlets and Spur Units.Switches, socket outlets and spur units shall, if nothing else is specified, be with plastic plates, ivory white, andinstalled in flush pattern boxes.

Surface mounted switches, socket outlets and spur units shall, if nothing is specified, be metal clad type with steelcover plates.

Light switches shall be 5 or 20 amp. According to the load switched and must be suitable for inductive loads up totheir ful current range.

Where nothing else is specified socket outlets shall be 13 amp. To comply with BS 1363.

Switches, socket outlets and spur units shall be of same manufacturer and shall match to each other throughout theElectrical Works.

2.12. Motors and Electrical EquipmentPrecise positions of these and of associated control switches; shall be ascertained by the Contractor. The Contractorshall carry out all conduct work, wiring and connections.

If nothing else is specified, isolators shall be supplied by the Contractor, but starters, control gear, etc shall be suppliedby others. All connections of starters, control gear, etc shall however if nothing else is specified be included in theElectrical Works.

2.45

Specifications 48

The Contractor shall ensure the correct rotation and running of all motors and control circuits and the correctfunctioning of all equipment. Conduit connections to motors and equipment shall be made by means of minimum20 mm flexible waterproof conduit and the rigid conduit shall terminate in a n adequate box. The earth continuityshall be maintained by means of an earth conductor run within the flexible conduit.

2.13 Light FittingsLight fitting ate if nothing else is specified, to be supplied by the electrical Contactor. The Contractor hall include inhis tender for cleaning, installation, connection, replacement of breakages and supply of matching light sources inaccordance with the attached schedule of light fitting or as specified on the drawings and in the ParticularSpecification.

Fluorescent fittings shall except where otherwise specified be phase compensated by means of a phase capacitor, onLC- coupling.

Cast-in boxes shall be completely covered by fittings

All light fittings shall be cleaned and the installation be in complete working order before Handing Over.

2.46

Specifications 49

SECTION 13 – DRAINAGE

1. GenerallyThe preambles for the previous trade sections are applicable to his section together with the following preambles. Thedrainage is to be carried out in accordance with the directions of the Mechanical Engineer and the requirements of theBye-laws. No length of drain is t be covered until it has been tested and passed.

2. P V C Drain PipesP V C drain pipes shall comply with ISQ R161 (4kg/cm) “pipes of Plastic Materials for the Transport of fluids”

The drain pipes shall be with spigot and socket glued joints.

3. Cast Iron Drain PipesShall be Centrifugal cast (spun) iron drain pipes with spigot and socket to BS 437 thoroughly coated inside and outside;alternatively similar pipes but class “B” in accordance with BS 1211 may be used according to availability. Fittingsshall be in accordance with BS 1130.

Pipes shall be jointed with asbestos yarn and caulked with molten lead or jointed with special jointing compound all toapproval.

4. Concrete Drain Pipes.Pre-cast concrete pipes shall be in general conformity with BS 556; Concrete cylindrical Pipes and Fittings. Theconcrete mix used for the manufacture of ordinary pipes shall not be weaker than Grade A.

For foul water drainage sulfate resisting concrete pipes shall always be used. The manufacturer of sulfate resisting pipesshall be in general conformity with BS 556. The concrete is not weaker than “A”

Pipes up to and including 450mm diameter shall be un-reinforced and shall incorporate spigot and socket type joints.Pipes above 450 mm diameter shall be reinforced with not less than steel fabric BS 110 or the equivalent in mild steeland shall have spigot and socket joints or if the Engineer so approved shall have the concrete. In socketed pipes thereinforcement shall be extended continuously from the pipe barrel into the socket, the longitudinal bars being cranked asnecessary.

No wall thickness of the pipe barrel is specified but the reinforcement (if any) and the wall thickness must be sobalanced that the pipes are in conformity with BS 556 and the test specified therein.

5. Pitch Impregnated Fiber Drain Pipes.Pitch impregnated fiber drain pipes, couplings and fitting shall comply with BS 2760 part 1 and 2.

6. ManholeManholes shall be constructed on drain lines in the positions indicated or wherever ordered by the Engineer.

Manholes on pipe drains shall be constructed with an in-situ base in concrete class “C” which shall be raised to formbenching and invert of the manholes. The benching and channels shall be carefully formed to shape according to thenumber, diameter and positions of the incoming and outgoing pipes. The channels in the manholes bases shall havecircular inverts. The benching shall be sloped towards the channels at a gradient of 1 in 6 or as otherwise detailed on thedrawings.

Benching shall be carried out in concrete class “C” and rendered with 15 mm 1:3 cement mortar. Rendering shall becarried out in sulfate resisting cement for foul water drainage. The end of all pipes entering the manholes are to becarefully cut to shape to suit the internal dimensions of the manholes are to be as short as possible and are to besurrounded with 15 mm concrete up to the first pipe joint.

2.47

Specifications 50

The manhole shall be constructed in accordance with the drawings for typical and special manholes. Cast iron steps formanholes shall comply with BS 1247. All steps to be hot dip galvanized after manufacture.

Manhole covers and frames shall be in accordance with the requirements of BS 497 and as specified on the drawings.

7. Concrete Beds etcConcrete beds shall be class “D” laid to correct falls, 300 mm wider than the external diameter of the pipe. Rates are toinclude for laying in two parts, the first part being laid on the trench bottom 75 mm thick and allowed to set before pipelaying is commenced. Individual pipes shall be firmly supported on pre-cast concrete blocks placed immediately behindthe socket and in such a manner that each pipe is accurately positioned in both line and level and the underside of thebarrel is at least 75 mm above the top of the concrete.

After the pipe joints have been made and the pipe lines satisfactorily tested, the first layer of the concrete bed shall bethoroughly washed down and cleaned and the remainder of the bedding concrete (and the haunching or surroundingconcrete where required) shall be placed and consolidated under and around the pipe in such a manner as not to causeany damage of disturbance to the pipe or joints.

The contractor is to ensure that his method of placing this second layer of concrete is such that the full length of eachpipe is fully supported. The overall depth of beds is to be in accordance with the table given on the drawings.

Where pipes are specified to be haunched, the bed shall be brought up with the second layer of concrete to a minimumoverall depth of 150 mm to the underside of the barrel of the pipe plus half of the diameter of the pipe and then slopedup to the top of the barrel of the drain pipes. Where pipes are specified to the surrounded, the bed shall be brought upwith the second layer of concrete to a minimum overall depth of 150 mm to the underside of the barrel of the pipe andthen completely surrounded with concrete with 150 mm minimum cover all round. Rates of this item are to include forany formwork required.

8. Trenches and Manhole Excavation and BackfillingThe bottom of the drain trenches are to be trimmed and consolidated to correct levels and gradients. If any trenches areover-excavated the Contractor is to fill up to the proper depth at his own expense with concrete class “E” whererequired. Rates for the drain trenches are to include for grading bottoms, any necessary planking and strutting andkeeping the excavations free from water, returning, filling in and ramming around over and disposing of surplus materialto spoil heaps on site. They shall also include for sieving and hand filling trenches where required for the first 300mmover the drain pipes.

Backfilling shall be executed with selected materials in 150 mm layers (300 mm layers if a mechanical rammer is used)each layer being well rammed and watered to obtain the maximum compaction. Care shall be taken to ensure that nostone or other work is placed within 300 mm of such work.

Rates for manhole excavation shall include for leveling the bottoms. All surfaces materials including top soil whichdiffers in any nature whatsoever from the sub-strata, shall in every case be carefully set aside and stored separately fromother excavated materials. No claim for extra payment will be allowed for setting aside top soil for later use.

9. Pipe laying and Jointing GenerallyAll laying and jointing of pipes shall conform generally with C.P 301. Each cast iron or concrete pipe shall be tested forsoundness before laying by striking with a hammer and any pipes or joints which do not ring true or which show in anyother way any sign of being defective shall be rejected.

2.48

Specifications 51

Each pipe shall be laid accurately to line and gradient so that the finished pipeline shall be in a straight line both inhorizontal and vertical planes. The Contractor shall fix properly painted and secured positioned sight rails, the levelsand positioning of which shall be checked by the Engineer before the rails are used and as often as may be necessary.There shall be not times less than three sight rails in position on each length of pipeline under construction to any othergradient and the sight rails shall be situated vertically above the line of pipes or immediately adjacent thereto.

10. Joining P V C Drain PipesThe type of joint used for P V C drain pipes is cemented spigot and socket. The jointing procedure is as follows: -

1) The spigot and shall be chamfered2) Clean spigot and socket will wet cloth and dry3) Ungrease spigot and socket with acetone4) Mark length of joint and spigot5) Apply first a relatively thick layer of cement on to spigot and then a thin layer into socket6) Push home the joint to the mark quickly and give at once a 90 degree twist7) Remove pressed out cement8) Do not disturb the joint for five minutes whilst cement is hardening.

The cement used shall be supplied by the factory, which is supplying the pipes.

11. Jointing Pre-cast Concrete PipesThe Contractor shall adopt such measures as may be approved by the Engineer to ensure that every laid pipe isconcentrating with previously laid pipes with which it joints. Unless otherwise approved pipes shall be laid in an upgradient direction and spigot shall be laid in the direction of the flow. Before commencing the laying operations, thecontractor shall ensure that the portions of pipe, which come into contact with jointing materials, are perfectly clean.

Cement mortar joints for concrete pipes with spigot and socket joints shall be made as follows:

1. Before commencing the jointing operation the socket of the previously placed pipe and the spigot for the newpipe shall be clean and thoroughly soaked with water.

2. The spigot shall be wrapped one complete lap with tarred hemp spun yarn and the new pipe shall be carefullydrawn towards the previously laid pipe so that the spigot enters the full depth into the socket of the previouslylaid pipe. The new pipe shall then be adjusted and fixed in its correct position in line, level and gradient and thetarred yarn shall be caulked tightly home into the socket. On completion of this operation the yarn shall not fillmore than one quarter of the total depth of the socket.

3. The reminder of the socket shall be completely filled with cement mortar consisting of one part of cement(“sulfate resisting cement for fouled water drainage) to three part of sand. The mortar filling shall terminateflush with the socket and shall be neatly toweled to a smooth finish completely around the pipe.

4. To assist the curing of the mortar the Constructor shall cover the joints immediately after they are made with alayer of hessian which shall be kept continuously wet during daylight hours and he shall further adopt such othermeasures as the Engineer may direct all at the Contractor’s expenses.

12. Positioning of floor gullies etcThe Contactor shall before positioning floor gullies, duck-foot bends for ventilating stacks etc. consult the Engineer inorder to ensure the correct position of these. Failure to do so shall in no way relieve the Contractor from positioningfloor gullies, duck-foot bends for ventilating stacks, etc in positions the Engineer may later direct.

2.49

Specifications 52

13. TestingAfter the drains are laid and jointed and before the trenches are filled in, they are to be tested in the presence of theEngineer’s representative. The drains shall be tested in lengths between manholes or such shorter lengths as therepresentative or the Engineer may approve.

Water shall be passed into the length under test until such time as all the air has been expelled and the line is full ofwater and subjected to a head of 1500 mm at the upstream end. The test shall be considered to be satisfactory if there isnot visible leakage, seepage or weeping from any of the pipes or joints and if the head of water in a 76 mm diameterupstand tube fitted at the upstream end does not fall at a rate faster than 12 mm per minute per 30 meters length. Thecontractor shall make such time allowance as maybe necessary for the pipe to absorb water before being subjected totest.

Manholes are to be tested for water-tightness in the same way as for drains by filling with water but not exceeding 1500mm head.

The Contractor is to supply all testing apparatus and materials necessary for these tests and provide all labor andassistance required. Any failure whatsoever in the drainage system to withstand the specified tests and any defectsappearing are to be made good and the drains re-tested to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2.50

Specifications 53

SECTION 14 – EXTERNAL WORKSThe preambles for the previous trade section are applicable to this section together with the following preambles:

EarthworksAll excavations are to be carried out to lines and levels as shown on drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

Surplus materials shall be disposed of by the Contractor according to the Engineer’s instructions.

Top SoilTop soil is defined as any layer of soil adjacent to the existing surface which contains or is discolored by roots, or otherorganic matter which in the opinion of the Engineer will affect the stability of any superimposed construction.

Top soil shall be removed to a depth of 150mm or such depths as may be directed, within the limits of the pavements.

The Excavated top soil shall either be stacked for re-use in soiling areas outside the limit for pavements or shall beremoved and spread as directed by the Engineer.

Road and Parking Area

Sub-Grade1. Description

This work shall consist of furnishing and placing approved granular sub-base material of the thickness and width and at thelocations shown on the plans or ordered by the Civil Engineer, in accordance with these specifications and in conformitywith the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.

Unsuitable soils are not accepted in the upper 250 mm of the sub-grade whether cut or fill. These soils include soils withCBR- Value below 7% (measured by 100% modified proctor, and after 24 hours soaking), and soils with content of big rootsor other vegetable matter and debris and other substances likely to hamper the compaction and stability of the sub-grade.

Soils on site will generally be accepted as materials for filling in the embankments. However, top soil, tree roots or othersoils containing vegetable matters will be rejected.

2. MaterialsThe material shall consist of hard, durable particles of fragments of stone or gravel, screened or crushed to the required sizeand grading. The material shall be free from vegetable matter and lumps or balls of clay and shall meet the requirements forone of the grading given in the table below and whichever is called for in the bid schedule, as determined by AASHO T27.

Sieve DesignationPercentage by weight

Passing square mesh sievesA B C

75 mm 100 - -

37.5 mm 75-85 100 -

25 mm - - 100

4.75 mm 45-65 30-70 40-80

850 mm 15-40 - -

75 mm 0-10 0-15 5-20

2.51

Specifications 54

NOTE

1) The percentage passing the 75 mm sieve shall not exceed ¼ of the percentage passing the 4.75 sieve.

2) That portion of the material passing a No. 40 sieve shall be non-plastic or shall have a liquid limit of not morethan 25 and plasticity index of not more than 6 as determined by AASHO T89 and T91 respectively.

3. Construction

3.1 Pits and QuarriesPits and quarries shall be cleared and grubbed.

3.2 PlacingThe sub-grade shall be shaped to the correct cambers gradient and levels as shown on the drawings for the full widthof the crown and shall be compacted to minimum 96% modified proctor to a depth of at least 300 mm or asspecified by the Engineer.

Compaction shall be carried out at Optimum Moisture Content, and the Contractor shall ensure, when water is addedto achieve this, that it shall be thoroughly mixed with the sub-grade material in the pre-scribed depth.

The sub-grade shall be constructed in such a manner and to such levels that no single points deviates more than 20mm from the stipulated levels. The deviations must not be one side.

3.3 MeasurementThe quantity to granular sub-base shall be measured either in square meters giving the thickness.

3.4 PaymentThe quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for at the contract price per unit of measurement,respectively for each of the particular pay items, which prices and payment shall be full compensation forfurnishing and placing the material and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete thework prescribed in this section.

4. Base

4.1 DescriptionThis work shall consist of a course composed of gravel or crushed aggregate, placed and compacted on a preparedroadbed in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, thickness, and typical crosssection shown on the plans.

4.2 Materials

4.2.1 GravelGravel shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stones or gravel, and a filler of sand or other finelydivided mineral matter. Oversize material encountered in deposits from which gravel is produced shall be removedby screening or shall be crushed to the required size, whichever the Contractor may select.

4.2.2 Crushed AggregateCrushed aggregate shall consist of hard, durable particles of fragments of stones or gravel crushed to the requiredsize, and a filler of sand or other finely divided mineral mater. When produced from gravel, not less then 50 percentby weight of the coarse aggregate retained on the 4.76 mm size sieve shall be particles having at least one fracturedface and if necessary to meet this requirement or to eliminate any excessive filler, the gravel shall be screened beforecrushing.

2.52

Specifications 55

5. General Requirements for Gravel and Crushed Aggregate.In addition to the requirements in section 4.2, gravel and crushed aggregate shall be uniformly graded from coarse tofine and shall conform to the requirements given in the table below for grading.

The portion of the material retained on a 4.76 mm sieve shall be known as coarse aggregate, and that portion passinga 4.76 mm sieve shall be known as fine aggregate. The material shall be free from vegetable matter and clay balls.

Coarse aggregate shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 50 at 500 revolutions as determined byAASHO T 96.

For all grading, that portion passing a 0.420 mm sieve, including filler, shall be non plastic or shall have a liquidlimit of not more than 25 and a plasticity index of not more than 6 as determined by AASHO T 89 and T 90respectively.

5.2 Grading requirements for aggregate.Percentage by weight passing Square mesh sieve AASHO T 11 and 27

SieveDesignation

Percentage By WeightPassing Square Mesh Sieve

A B C D E F G75 mm 10063 mm 10050 mm 70-100 80-100 10037.5 mm 60-80 68-88 80-100 10025 mm 50-70 53-73 60-80 70-100 10019 mm 40-60 35-55 50-70 60-80 70-90 10012.5 mm - - - 50-70 60-80 65-95 1009.5 mm 25-45 29-49 30-50 40-60 45-75 55-85 75-1004.75 mm 15-35 17-37 20-45 25-45 30-60 35-65 45-752.36 mm - - - - - - -2.00 mm 5-25 8-28 10-30 15-35 15-40 20-50 25-55425 mm 0-15 0-18 5-20 1-20 0-30 0-15 5-3575 mm 0-10 0-13 0-10 0-15 0-20

0-150-20

Columns, A, B, C, are for Base CourseColumns, AD, E, F & G are for Surface CourseColumns, E & G are for Bituminous Road Surface Course.

5.3 Blending MaterialsIn fine aggregate or filler in addition to that naturally present in the base course material is necessary in order to meetthe grading requirements, or for satisfactory bonding of the material, it shall be uniformly blended with the basecourse material at the screening and crushing plant or on the road. The material for such purpose shall be obtainedfrom sources approved by the Engineer and shall be free from hard lumps.

5.3 Calcium ChlorideCalcium chloride shall conform to the requirements of AASHO M 144.

2.53

Specifications 56

6. PlacingThe base shall be placed on the prepared surface and compacted in layers not exceeding 150mm or as approved by theEngineer. When more than one layer is required, each layer shall be shaped and compacted before the succeedinglayer is placed.

The placing of material shall not begin until the surface on which it is to be placed has been approved by the Engineer.Placing shall be from spreader boxes or from vehicles especially equipped to distribute the material in a uniform layer orwindow. The layer or window shall be of such size that when spread and compacted, making due allowance for anyblending material that is to be added on the road, the layer shall have the required thickness.

When hauling is done over previously placed material, hauling equipment shall be routed as uniformly as possible overthe entire area of previously constructed layer.

6.1 Adding Blending MaterialWhen additional fine aggregate or filler is required and it is to be blended with the material on the road, the blendingmaterial shall be uniformly placed with spreader boxes or other approved devices.

6.2 Mixing and SpreadingAfter each layer of base course material has been placed, and blending material added when required, it shall bethoroughly mixed to its full depth by means of power graders, traveling mixers, or other mixing equipment. During themixing, water shall be added in the amount necessary to provide the optimum moisture content for compacting asspecified in section below. When uniformly mixed, the mixture shall be spread smoothly to a uniform thickness or incase of the top layer, to the cross section shown on the plans.

The contractor shall so schedule his operations as to assure completion of compaction within 48 hours after mixing andspreading.

6.3 CompactingImmediately following final spreading and smoothing, each layer shall be compacted to the full width. Rolling shallprogress gradually from the side to the center parallel with the centerline of the road, and shall continue until the entiresurface has been rolled. Any irregularities or depressions that develop shall be corrected by loosening the material atthese places and adding or removing material until the surface is smooth and uniform. Along curbs, headers, and walland at all places not accessible to the compactor, the base material shall be tamped thoroughly with mechanical tampers.The material shall be both bladed and rolled until a smooth even surface has been obtained.

During the progress of the work, the engineer will make density tests in accordance with AASHO T 191, modified toinclude only materials passing a 19.0mm sieve, and if he finds the density, is less than 100 percent of the maximumdensity as determined by AASHO T99. Method C, the Contractor shall perform additional rolling or tamping as may benecessary to obtain that density. Other types of field density tests may be used for control purposes after density valuescorresponding to those obtained by AASHO T 191 have been established.

6.4 Thickness RequirementsThe cutting of test holes and refilling with material properly compacted shall be done by the Contractor under thesupervision of the Engineer.

6.5 Surface RequirementsWhen tested by a crown template, conforming to the typical cross section shown on the plans, and an ammeterstraightedge applied at right angles and parallel respectively to the centerline of the roadbed, the variation of the surfacefrom each testing edge between any two contacts with the surface shall at no point exceed 1.0 cm for the crown templateand 1.0 cm for the straightedge.

2.54

Specifications 57

If the contractor elects to produce and stockpile aggregates prior to placement on the roadbed, the aggregates shall bestockpiled to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

7. Measurement

7.1 Square Meter BasisThe area of aggregate base course complete in place, compacted to the depth and width as shown on the planssatisfactory to the engineer shall be measured by station length along the center line of the roadway for the length andthe measured widths as shown on the plans.

7.2 Cubic Meter BasisThe quantity of aggregate base course shall be the number of cubic meters acceptable and laid and compacted asmeasured by cross section or by nominal cross section area times the station length.

7.3 Metric tonsThe weight of aggregate base course shall be determined by weighing boarded truck on approved scales minus the tareweight of the truck.

7.4 PaymentsThe quantities, determined as provided above, shall be paid for and which payment shall be full compensation forfurnishing and placing all materials, including all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete thework prescribed in this section.

2.55

Specifications 58

SECTION 15 – Surfacing and pavement

Aggregate surfacing

15.1 DescriptionThis work shall consist of a course composed of gravel or crushed aggregate, whichever is called for in the bidschedule, constructed on a prepared roadbed in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines,grades, and typical cross sections on the plans.

15.2 MaterialsMaterials shall conform to the requirements of Section 14, except as to grading and plasticity of aggregate.

Gravel and crushed aggregate shall meet the requirements given in the table below for the grading .For all grading, that portion passing C 420 mm sieve, including blending filler, shall have a liquid limit of not more than35 and a plasticity index of not less than 4 nor more than 9 as determined by AASHO T89 and T90 respectively.

15.3 ConstructionMethods shall conform to all the requirements for construction methods under Section 14.

Grading Requirements for Aggregate SurfacingPercentage by Weight Passing SquareMesh sieve AASHTO T11 and T 27 for Grading

Sievedesignation

A B C D E

37.5 mm 100 - - - -25 mm - 100 - - 10019 mm - - 100 - 85-100

12.5 mm 40-75 - - 100 -9.5 mm - - - - 65-100

4.75 mm 30-60 40-75 45-80 - 55-852.00 mm - 25-60 25-60 26-60 40-70425 mm - - - - 25-45

75 mm 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-12

15.4 MeasurementThe quantity of aggregate surfacing to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters measured in the vehicles, or thenumber of metric tons as determined by weighing loaded trucks on approved scales minus the tare weight of the truck,whichever is called for in the Bills ;of Quantities.

15.5 PaymentThe quantities, determined as provided above, shall be paid for at the contract price unit of measurement, respectively,for each of the particular pay items listed below that is shown in the bills of Quantities, which prices and payment shallbe full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including the labour, equipment, tools, and incidentalsnecessary to complete the work prescribed in this section.

15.6 Bituminous Prime Coat

15.6.1 DescriptionThis work shall consist of furnishing and applying bituminous material to a previously prepared roadbed in accordancewith these specifications and to the width shown on the typical cross section on the plans.

2.56

Specifications 59

15.6.2 Materials15.6.2.1 Blotter Materials

Blotter material shall be clean, graded sand or when called for in the Special Conditions, it shall be a suitable materialfurnished under another contract item.

15.6.2.2 Bituminous MaterialsBituminous materials shall be of the type and grade that shall conform to the requirements of the specifications listedbelow or as directed by the Engineer.

Slow-curing liquid bituminous material - AASHO MM 141Medium-curing cutback bitumen - AASHO M 82Rapid-curing cutback bitumen - AASHO M81

Grades (with temperatures of application in degrees C) shall be as follows:

Slow-curing liquid bituminous material sc-1 (450-850), SC- 2(600-1000)Medium-curing cutback bitumen - MC-0 (200-600), MC-1 (45-85)

- MC-2 (600-1000), Mc-3 (800-1200)Rapid-curing cutback bitumen - RC-2 (600-1000)

15.7 Construction

15.7.1 Weather LimitationsPrime coat shall be applied only when the surface to be treated is dry or slightly damp, when the atmospherictemperature in the shade is above 130C and rising or above 150C, if falling, and when the weather is suitable.

15.7.2 EquipmentThe equipment used by the contractor shall include a roller, a power broom and/or a power blower, a self-poweredpressure bituminous material distributor (sprayer) and equipment for heating bituminous material.

The distributor shall have pneumatic tires of such width and number that the load produced on the road surface shall notexceed 108 kg per cm of tire width, and shall be so designed, equipped, maintained and operated that bituminousmaterial at even heat may be applied uniformly on variable widths of surface up to 4.6 meters at readily determined andcontrolled rates from 0.17 to 7.04 liters per square meter as determined by the Engineer, with uniform pressure, andwith an allowable variation from any specified rate not to exceed 0.07 liter per square meter. Distributor equipmentshall include a tachometer, pressure gauges accurate volume measuring devices or calibrated tank, and a thermometerfor measuring temperatures of tank contents.

Distributors shall be equipped with a separate power unit for the pump, and full circulations spray bars, which shall beadjustable laterally and vertically. The spray bars on the distributor shall be controlled by a bootman riding on the rearof the distributor in such position that operation of all sprays are in his full view. The Engineer shall require a test toensure even distribution over the length of the spray bar and that application is at the required rate.

15.7.3 Cleaning SurfaceImmediately before applying the bituminous material all loose dirt and other objectionable material shall be removedfrom the surface with a power broom and/or blower as required. If the engineer so orders, the surface shall be lightlybladed and rolled immediately prior to the application of bituminous material, in which case brooming or blowing willnot be required. When so ordered by the engineer a light application of water shall be made just before the application ofbituminous material.

2.57

Specifications 60

15.7.4 Application of Bituminous Material

Bituminous material shall be applied by means of a distributor at the rate directed by the Engineer. Which will usuallybe from 1.00 to 1.20 liters per square meter, and at a temperature within the range described before for the particularmaterial being used. Any prescribed application shall be divided into two applications when necessary to preventflowing off the surface and additional bituminous material shall be applied where surface conditions indicate it to benecessary, if the Engineer so directs.

When necessary to provide for traffic, the prime coat shall be applied in lanes of approximately one-half the width of thecompleted surface, unless the extreme width of the surface makes such application impracticable, in which case theprime coat shall be applied in more than two lanes as required. When applied in two or more lanes, there shall be aslight over lap of bituminous material along the adjoining edges of lanes.

The surface of structures and trees adjacent to the areas being treated shall be protected in such manner as to preventtheir being spattered or marred. No bituminous material shall be discharged into a borrow pit or gutter.

15.7.5 Maintenance and Opening to Traffic

Traffic shall not be permitted on the primed surface until the bituminous material has penetrated and dried and in theopinion of the Engineer, will not pick up under traffic, provided that if it becomes necessary to permit traffic prior to thattime but in no case sooner than four hours after the application of the bituminous material, blotter material shall beapplied as directed by the Engineer and traffic shall be permitted to use the lanes so treated. Blotter material shall bespread from trucks in such a manner that no wheel will travel in uncovered wet bituminous material. When applyingblotter material to a treated lane that adjoins a lane yet to be treated, a strip at least 20 cm wide along the adjoiningedge shall be left uncovered, or if covered shall be uncovered when the second lane is being prepared for treatment, inorder to permit an overlap of bituminous material as required.

15.8 Bituminous Surface Treatment

15.8.1 DescriptionThis work shall consist of one or more applications of bituminous material and spreading of aggregate, constructed on apreviously prepared surface in accordance with these specifications and to the width shown on the typical cross sectionon the plans.

15.8.2 Quantity of Materials per Square Meter

The approximate quantities of materials per square meter and the sequence of applications and spreading shall meet therequirements gibes in Table 3.5-1 below for the treatment designation called for in the bid schedule:

Specifications 61

Table 3.5-1: Quantities of materials per square meter.

Treatment Designation 1 2 3 4 5 6Aggregate Grading AndSequence Of Operations

Single Double Double Triple Double Quadruple

Apply Bituminous Material InLiters

1.14 0.85 0.95 0.57 1.14 0.76

0.50 0.95 1.14 1.33 1.520.57 0.76

Spread Aggregate – KgGrading F 3.6Grading E 4.5 6.8 3.6 5.4Grading D 11.3 11.3 5.4 9.1Grading C 15.9 9.1Grading B 18.1 22.7Grading A 31.8TotalsBituminous Material – liters 1.14 1.35 1.90 2.28 2.47 3.8Aggregate - kg 11.3 15.8 22.7 27.1 31.8 49.9

The weights given above are those of aggregate having a bulk specific gravity of 2.65, as determined by AASHO T85. Proportionate corrections shall be made when the aggregate furnished on the job has a bulk specific gravity above2.75 or below 2.55. In such case the corrected amount shall be the product of the number of Kg shown in the tablemultiplied by the ratio of the bulk specific gravity for the aggregate to 2.65.

The amounts given in Table 3.5-1 are approximate and the exact amounts shall be set by the Engineer for eachapplication and spreading. Total amounts of bituminous material per square meter may be varied by the Engineer asnecessary to fit conditions, but the total amount of aggregate per square meter, after adjustment for specific gravity,shall not be changed, except the Engineer may order that a portion of it be placed in stockpiles and, similarly, he mayorder some of the apportionment for stockpiling used in the surface treatment.

15.8.3 Materials15.8.3.1 Aggregate

Aggregate for the several designations of surface treatments shall be crushed stone and shall meet the requirements forgrading given in table 3.5-2.

Table 3.5-2: Requirements For Grading Of Aggregate For Bituminous Surface Treatments

Sieve DesignationPercentage by weight passing

A B C D E F37.5 mm 10025.0 mm 90-100 10019.0 mm 20-55 90-100 10012.5 mm 0-10 20-55 90-100 1009.5 mm 0-15 0-15 40-70 85-100 100 1004.75 mm 0-5 0-5 0-15 10-30 85-100 85-1002.36 mm 0-5 0-10 10-40 60-100150 mm 0-10

Specifications 62

Aggregate shall be free from clay balls and adherent films of clay or other matter that would prevent thorough coatingwith bituminous material.

It shall be of such nature that after being coated thoroughly with bituminous material of the type to be used in the work,over 95 per cent of the bituminous material will be retained; after being subjected to a stripping test in accordance withAASHO T 182. This stripping test requirement may be waived if the material has a record of satisfactory performance.The material shall have a swell of not more than 1.5 per cent as determined by method A of AASHO T 101.

15.8.3.2 Bituminous MaterialBituminous materials shall be of the type and grade called for in the bid schedule and shall conform to the requirementof the specifications and reference listed below. When more than one grade is shown in the bid schedule, the grade shallbe that directed by the Engineer.

Medium-curing cutback bitumen AASHO M81Rapid-curing cutback bitumen AASHO M140

Grades (with temperature of application in degree C), shall be as follows:

Medium-curing cutback bitumen MC-4 (900-1300), MC-5 (1050-1400)Bituminous cement – penetration 120-150 (1400-1750)

200-300 (1250-1600)

15.8.4 Construction

15.8.4.1 Weather LimitationsSurface treatments shall be applied only when the existing surface is dry or slightly damp, when the atmospherictemperature in the shade is above 150c and when the weather is suitable.

15.8.4.2 EquipmentThe equipment used by the Contractor shall include a power broom and/or a power blower, dragging equipment, apneumatic tired roller, aggregate spreading equipment that con be so adjusted as to spread accurately the given amountsper square meter, a distributor, and equipment for heating bituminous material. For treatment designations 1, 2, 3, 4, 5and 6 the equipment shall also include a pneumatic-tyred motor grader.

The pressure distributor shall conform to the requirements of chapter 3.4 of this section.

Pneumatic tired rollers shall have a total compacting width of not less than 1.5 m and the gross weight shall beadjustable within the range of 36 to 63 kilograms per cm of compacting width. The operating weight shall be as directedby the engineer.

Other equipment of proven performance may be used by the contractor in addition to or in lieu of the specifiedequipment when approved by the Engineer.

15.8.4.3 Reconditioning of roadbedSurface treatment shall not commence until the surface receiving the treatment has been approved by the Engineer.

2.60

Specifications 63

15.8.4.4 Sequence of OperationsBituminous surface treatment shall be applied using quantities and sequence of operations as outlined above. Eachspreading of aggregate shall immediately follow application of bituminous material, except where the first spreadingequipment to be placed directly on the previously bituminized surface.

In the case of designation No. 6 surface treatment, an interval of at least 24 hours shall elapse between application of thethird layer and that of the fourth, during which period the surface shall be opened to traffic and maintained by theContractor by brooming and rolling.

15.8.4.5 Cleaning Existing SurfacePrior to placing the first layer of surface treatment, loose dirt and other objectionable material shall be removed from theexisting surface. If so directed by the engineer the surface shall be cleaned with a power broom or power blower.

15.8.4.6 Application of Bituminous MaterialBituminous material shall be so applied that uniform distribution is obtained at all points. Building paper shall be spreadon the surface for a sufficient distance back from the beginning and end of each application so that flow through thenozzles may be started and stopped on the paper and so that all nozzles will operate properly on the entire surface beingtreated. Building paper so used shall be removed and disposed of in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Applicationtemperature shall be within the range called for in this Section for the particular bituminous material being used. Duringall applications the surfaces of adjacent structures and trees shall be protected in such manner as to prevent their beingspattered or marred. No bituminous material shall be discharged into a borrow pit or gutter.

15.8.4.7 Spreading and shaping AggregateInitial spreading of each layer of aggregate for all designations of surface treatment shall be done with the aggregatespreading equipment specified.

Before the bituminous material is applied, sufficient seal aggregate to cover the distributor load of bitumen shall be intruck on the roadway at the site of the work.

Trucks spreading aggregate shall be operated backward so that bituminous material will be covered before truck wheelspass over it. Supplemental spreading and smoothing of the first layer of designations 4, 5 and 6 shall be done with theemotor grader or approved drag specified. All other supplemental spreading and smoothing shall be done with a broomdrag and by hand methods where necessary.

15.8.4.8 Brooming and RollingFollowing spreading and smoothing, each layer of aggregate shall be rolled as directed. Except where a motor grader orapproved drag is used for supplemental shaping and smoothing, broom dragging shall accompany rolling. The finallayer of treatment in all cases shall be alternately broom dragged and rolled thoroughly until the surface is fullycompacted and bonded to full width. The Contractor shall not allow traffic over complete surface treatments forthe first 24 hours after aggregate is applied unless permitted by the Engineer.

Specifications 64

SECTION 16 – MISCELLANEOUS

1. Precast Concrete flagsThe precast concrete flags shall conform in all respect to BS 368

2. Precast Concrete kerbs, channels and EdgingsThe precast concrete kerbs etc, shall conform in all respects to BS 340

3. Demolition’sThese works must be carried out at times arranged and convenient to the Employer or as described elsewhere in these tenderdocuments.

The contractor will be held fully responsible for any unnecessary damages caused to furniture, equipment in consequence ofthese works. He shall reinstate all damages at his own expense and indemnify the employer against any loss whatsoeverarising therefrom.

The Contractor must give the necessary notices and must exercise all due care in the demolition. During the demolitionworks the Contractor shall keep the debris constantly watered to minimize the dust arising and this must be included in hisprices.

Unless otherwise stated all re-usable and approved materials arising from demolitions shall become the property of theEmployer and the Contractor shall dismantle such materials carefully and stack them in piles ready for inspection by theArchitect. Debris and disqualified materials shall be removed from site.

2.63

BILL NO. ONE (1)

PRELIMINARIES

Consting Consult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors

PROPOSED GOVERNOR'S MANSION, MERU COUNTY

Description Shs.

A THE PROJECT TEAM

The “Employer”

County Secretary

Meru County

P. O. Box 120 - 60200

MERU

The “Architect” and Lead Consultants

K&M Archplans

P. O. Box 76240- 00508

Tel. 020 - 2723298

Fax. 020 - 2718159

NAIROBI

The "Quantity Surveyor"

Constingconsult Ltd

P. O. Box 51509 - 00200

Tel. 020 - 3860640

Wireless 020 -2650954 Cell: 0728-891924

NAIROBI

The "Civil / Structural Engineer"

Xenocon Consulting Engineers

P. O. Box 59385 - 00200

Tel. 020 - 4444837

Fax: 020 - 4443828

NAIROBI

The "Electrical Engineer"

Mecoy Associates Ltd

P. O. Box 53086 - 00200

Tel. 020 - 2723754

Fax: 020 - 2727555

NAIROBI

The "Mechanical Engineer"

Mecoy Associates Ltd

P. O. Box 53086 - 00200

Tel. 020 - 2723754

Fax: 020 - 2727555

TOTAL CARRIED TO COLLECTION

BILL NO. 1

PRELIMINARIES

PART ONE (1) - PARTICULAR PRELIMINARIES

Bill No. 1

Preliminaries 1/1Consting Consult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors


A PRICING ITEMS OF PRELIMINARIES

Prices shall be inserted against items of preliminaries in the tenderer's priced

Bills of Quantities.

Please note that failure to price any item of general particular preliminaries will be

construed to mean that the tenderer wishes to provide for that item free of charge.

The rates shall be deemed to include for all costs involved in complying with all the

requirements for the proper execution of the whole of the works in the Contract.

B VALUE ADDED TAX, DUTIES AND LEVIES

The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the V.A.T. Public Notice No. 6 of 5th August

1993 regarding the Finance Bill (1993) (and any subsequent amendments to-date)

which requires the Contractor to pay Value Added Tax (V.A.T.) for all Contracts

entered into after 1st September 1993. All tender rates shall be inclusive of VAT,

all other taxes, levies and duties in force at the time of tender.

Please note that from every interim and final payment, VAT shall be deducted and

paid directly to the Commissioner of Value Added Tax (V.A.T)

C SCOPE OF CONTRACT

The Contract shall comprise the construction and completion of an Executive

Governor's Mansion including related facilities as well as Services Engineering

installations and Specialist installations as follows:

(a) General builders works - New works

(b) External and Civil works

(c) Building services installations shall include:

- Electrical light and power installations

- Voice and Data installations

- Plumbing, drainage and fire fighting installations

- Air conditioning and Mechanical Ventilation installations

- Sanitary appliances supply and installation

D PAYMENTS

There shall be NO Advance payments in this Contract. However the Client may

allow advance payment upon the Contractor's request and provision of an

approved bank guarantee and other conditions.

E MATERIALS FROM DEMOLITIONS

Any materials arising from demolitions and not re-used shall become the property

of the County Government.

F LOCATION OF SITE

The site for the works is on a piece of land next to Alba Hotel within the Meru

town. Access to the site is from the Meru - Nanyuki Road within Meru.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS

The works in this Contract shall comprise the construction and completion of an

Executive residential house as described below:

a) Main House approximately 1265 Square Metres total plinth in three floors -

ground floor (458 Sm), first floor (411 Sm) and attic floor (396 Sm)

b) Detached domestic servant quarters on one floor approximately 100 square

metres floor area

b) Related electrical and mechanical installations.

c) Related external and civil works which include water and power reticulation,

storm and water drainage, gazebo, swimming pool and changing rooms, access

road, driveways and parking, elaborate landscaping and boundary walling with two

gates and gate houses.

B EXISTING PROPERTY AND SERVICES

The Contractor shall take every precaution to avoid damage to all existing property

including roads, cables, drains and other services and he will be held responsible

for all damage arising from the execution of this Contract to the aforementioned,

and he shall make good all such damage where directed at his own expense to the

satisfaction of the Project Architect

C CONTRACT COMPLETION PERIOD

The contract completion period shall be as stated in the Appendix to Conditions of

Contract and must be strictly adhered to.

The Project Architect shall strictly monitor the Contractor's progress in relation to

the progress chart and should it be found necessary, the Project Architect shall

inform the Contractor in writing that his actual performance on site is not

satisfactory.

The Contractor is required to bid for the completion period and should enter the

completion period on the form of Tender and all other provided spaces.

D SIGNBOARD

The Contractor must allow for providing, erecting and maintaining a site signboard,

the size, type of construction and lettering of which shall be to the Project

Architect's design. The names of the Consultants are to be in lettering 50mm high.

The board is to be fixed in an elevated position on the site where indicated by the

Project Architect. On completion of the works, the notice board shall be removed

and making good shall be carried out as necessary.

E LABOUR CAMPS

No labour with the exception of a watchman may be housed on the site. The cost

of transporting labour to and from the site or elsewhere will be deemed to included

in the tender.

F PARTICULAR INSERTIONS TO BE MADE ON APPENDIX TO CONDITIONS OF

CONTRACT

For particular insertions see Appendix to Conditions of Contract section ACC


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


PART TWO (2) - GENERAL PRELIMINARIES

A DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Abbreviations used in these Bills of Quantities shall be interpreted as follows:-

a “Approved”: Shall mean approved by the Project Architect.

b “As directed”: Shall mean as directed by the Project Architect.

c “B.S.”: Shall mean

the Current British Standard specifications published by the British

Standards institution, 2 Park Street, London W. I, England.

d “Kg.”: Shall mean Kilograms

e “No.”: Shall mean Number

f “MM”: Shall mean Millimetres

g “LM.”: Shall mean Linear Metres

h “SM.”: Shall mean Square Metres

I “C.M.”: Shall mean Cubic Metres

j “M.S.” or "m/s": Shall mean Measured separately

k “Prs": Shall mean Pairs

l Words denoting the "Male" shall be deemed to represent the "Female" and vice

versa.

m “Ditto”: Shall mean

the whole of the preceding description except as qualified in the section in

which it occurs. Where it occurs in brackets it shall mean the whole of the

preceding description which is contained in the appropriate brackets.

n The term "Employer" or "Client" wherever used in this contract shall be

synonymous.

B DISCLAIMER

The information in part one above is given as a guide only. Tenderers are

expected to verify all information given above from the drawings, specifications

and bills of quantities. The Client or his agents will not be held liable for any losses

or inaccuracies arising from the use of the said information

C ACCESS TO SITE

Access to site is through the main entrance after Nakumatt supermarket off Meru -

Nanyuki Road and the Contractor shall provide alternative temporary access to the

site as necessary where shown by the Employer. The Contractor must allow here

for all costs incurred in providing and maintaining the access to the site.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A VISIT THE SITE

The Contractor is advised to visit the site and will be deemed to have satisfied

himself with regard to the conditions of the site, the nature of the materials to be

excavated and conditions under which the works will have to be carried out, the

supply of and conditions affecting labour and the facilities for obtaining the articles

or materials referred to in these Bills of Quantities. No claim by the Contractor for

additional payment will be allowed on the ground of any misunderstanding or

misapprehension in respect of any such matter or otherwise. Any damage cause to

existing accesses and roads must be made good as directed by and to the

approval of the Project Architect.

B DRAWINGS

The Contractor will be deemed to have examined the drawings before tendering

and to have satisfied himself regarding their details and regarding the nature and

extent of the works and the method of construction involved. No claims arising out

of misapprehension in these respects will be allowed. Drawings may be seen by

appointment at the offices of the Architect during normal working hours. The works

are to be executed in accordance with the drawings referred to in the Appendix to

these Bills of Quantities together with any drawings which may be supplied in

amplification or amendment thereof.

C FORM OF CONTRACT

The Form of Contract and Agreement used is the STANDARD CONDITIONS

CONTRACT FORMING PART OF STANDARD TENDER DOCUMENTS FOR

PROCUREMENT OF WORKS (SMALL WORKS) issued by PUBLIC

PROCUREMENT AUTHORITY (PPOA) Some amendments have been made to

the Standard Contract to suit the requirements of the project. In particular, two

clauses dealing with nominated sub-contractors and suppliers have been

introduced.

Reference to Contract clauses appearing hereunder, is to the PPOA Standard of

Tender Documents. Any deviations, deletions or additions appearing herein

having been made to suit the specifics of the project should override any contract

provisions in the Standard Public Procurement Contract.

D CLAUSES OF THE CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the clauses of the Conditions of Contract

and deletions, additions and modifications thereto which shall be read as

incorporated herein and he shall allow any sums which he considers necessary for

the observance of such conditions. (the full contract clauses are contained

elsewhere in this document)

1 Clause 1

Definitions

2 Clause 2

Interpretations

3 Clause 3

Language and law

4 Clause 4

Project Manager's/Architect's DecisionsTOTAL CARRIED TO COLLECTION

Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


5 Clause 5

Delegation

6 Clause 6

Communication

7 Clause 7

Sub-Contracting

8 Clause 8

Other Contractors

9 Clause 9

Personnel

10 Clause 10

Works

11 Clause 11

Safety and Temporary Works

12 Clause 12

Discoveries

13 Clause 13

Work Program

14 Clause 14

Possession of site

15 Clause 15

Access to site

16 Clause 16

Date instructions

17 Clause 17

Extension or Acceleration of completion Date

18 Clause 18

Management meetings

19 Clause 19

Early warning

20 Clause 20

Defects

21 Clause 21

Bills of Quantities

22 Clause 22

Variations


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


23 Clause 23

Payment certificate, currency of payment and advance payment. No

advance payment shall be made. Subclause 23.7(b) and ( c) is deleted.

No payment in foreign currency

24 Clause 24

Compensation Events

25 Clause 25

Price adjustment

26 Clause 26

Retention

27 Clause 27

Liquidated damages

28 Clause 28

Securities

29 Clause 29

Dayworks

30 Clause 30

Liability and Insurance

31 Clause 31

Completion and taking over

32 Clause 32

Final Account

33 Clause 33

Termination

34 Clause 34

Payment upon Termination

35 Clause 35

Release from perfomance

36 Clause 36

Corrupt Gifts and Commission

37 Clause 38

Settlement of Disputes

The County Secretary

Meru County

P. O. Box 120 - 60200

MERU

The name of the Contract is THE PROPOSED GOVERNOR'S MANSION FOR

THE MERU COUNTY IN MERU TOWN


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


The start date shall be AS STATED IN THE LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE

The Intended Completion Date for the whole of the Works shall be AS STATED IN

THE APPENDIX TO CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

The following documents also form part of the Contract: PROGRAMME OF

WORKS SUBMITTED BY THE CONTRACTOR AND APPROVED BY THE

PROJECT ARCHITECT

The Contractor shall submit a program for the Works within 14 DAYS of delivery of

the Letter of Acceptance.

The Site Possession Date shall be AS STATED IN THE LETTER OF

ACCEPTANCE

The Defects Liability period is 180 DAYS AFTER DATE OF PRACTICAL

COMPLETION days.

The minimum insurance covers shall be;

1 The minimum cover for insurance of the Works and of Plant and Materials in

respect of the Contractor’s faulty design is 20% OF CONTRACT SUM

2 The minimum cover for loss or damage to Equipment is KSHS. 10% OF

CONTRACT SUM

3 The minimum cover for insurance of other property is KSHS. 10% OF CONTRACT

SUM

4 The minimum cover for personal injury or death insurance for the Contractor's

employees is 10% OF CONTRACT SUM

And for other people is 5% OF CONTRACT SUM

The following events shall also be Compensation Events: NON OTHER THAN AS

DEFINED IN THESE CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

The period between Program updates is 14 DAYS.

The amount to be withheld for late submission of an updated Program is ANY

FULL CERTIFICATE DUE

The proportion of payments retained is 10% OF CERTIFIED AMOUNT.

The Price Adjustment Clause SHALL NOT APPLY. THIS IS A FIXED PRICE

CONTRACT

The liquidated damages for the whole of the Works is KSHS. 100,000/- (per week

or part thereof)

The Performance Security shall be for the following minimum amounts equivalent

as a percentage of the Contract Price 10 PERCENT (%)

The Completion Period for the Works is AS INSERTED IN THE FORM OF

TENDER BY THE TENDERER


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


The rate of exchange for calculation of foreign currency payments is NOT

APPLICABLE

The standards of workmanship and materials used are expected to be of the

highest levels achievable to be commensurate with the best standards in the

building industry in Kenya.

The Employer shall have the right under this contract to hire others to carry out

work falling under the contract if the contract fails to achieve the required

standards of materials and workmanship.

A SUFFICIENCY OF TENDER

The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself before tendering to the

correctness and sufficiency of his Tender for the works and of rates and prices

stated in the priced Bills of Quantities, which rates and prices shall cover all his

obligations under the Contract and all matters and means necessary for the proper

completion and maintenance of the Works. The rates and prices shall not be

changed whatsoever after tender opening.

B PERFORMANCE BOND

The Contractor shall find and submit on the Form of Tender Bond an approved

bank and who will be willing to be bound by the County Secretary, Meru County in

and amount equal to Ten per cent (10%) of the contract amount for the due

performances of the Contract up to the date of completion as certified by the

Project Architect and who will when and if called upon, sign a Bond to that effect

on the relevant standard form included herein. (without the addition of any

limitations) on the same day as the Contract Agreement is signed, by the Meru

County. The Contractor shall furnish within seven days another Surety to the

approval of the said County Secretary.

C PROVISIONAL WORK

All work described as "Provisional" in these Bills of Quantities is subject to

remeasurement in order to ascertain the actual quantity executed for which

payment will be made. All "Provisional" and other work liable to adjustment under

this Contract shall be left uncovered for a reasonable time to allow all

measurements needed for such adjustment to be taken by the Quantity Surveyor.

Immediately the work is ready for measuring, the Contractor shall give notice to

the Quantity Surveyor. If the Contractor makes default in these respects he shall if

the Project Architect so directs uncover the work to enable all measurements to be

taken and afterwards reinstate at his own expense.

D ALTERATIONS TO BILLS, PRICING, ETC

Any unauthorised alteration or qualification made to the text of the Bills of

Quantities may cause the Tender to be disqualified and will in any case be

ignored. The Contractor shall be deemed to have made allowance in his prices

generally to cover any items against which no price has been inserted in the priced

Bills of Quantities. All items of measured work shall be priced in detail and the

Tenders containing Lump Sums to cover trades or groups of work must be broken

down to show the price of each item before they will be accepted.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

The works are to be carried out with new materials of the best quality as specified

and all work carried out in workmanlike manner.

When substitution of materials is permitted the substitutes shall not be of inferior

quality to those originally specified. All materials shall be in accordance with British

Standard Specifications latest Edition (B.S) when such exist except where

acceptable Local Standard is available. All materials shall be obtainable from

approved manufacturers and used in accordance with their instructions.

Samples of materials and manufactured articles shall be submitted to the Architect

and approved before commencement or use thereof.

The Contractor may be required to execute small specimens of work and shall

allow for doing so in his rates in preliminaries.

No work involving special design shall be put in hand without first consulting the

Architect. Materials shall be properly stored and protected from damage or

contamination and any materials which in the opinion of the Architect are

damaged, deteriorated or otherwise unsuitable for incorporation in the works shall

be removed immediately from the site and replaced at the contractor’s expense.

Workmanship shall conform to recognized good practice and British Standard

Codes of Practice (B.S.C.P) when such exists. Where in doubt the tenderer is

required to confirm with the designers

B BLASTING OPERATIONS

Blasting will only be allowed with the express permission of the Project Architect

in writing. All blasting operations shall be carried out at the Contractor's sole risk,

and cost in accordance with any County regulations in force for the time being, and

any special regulations laid down by the Project Architect governing the use and

storage of explosives.

C MATERIALS ARISING FROM EXCAVATIONS

Materials of any kind obtained from the excavations shall be the property of the

Client. Unless the Project Architect directs otherwise such materials shall be dealt

with as provided in the Contract. Such materials shall only be used in the works, in

substitution of materials which the Contractor would otherwise have had to supply

with the written permission of the Project Architect and due allowance or credit

made for the materials used

D CONTRACTOR'S SUPERINTENDENCE/SITE AGENT

The Contractor shall constantly keep on the works a literate English speaking

Agent or Representative, competent and experienced in the kind of work involved

who shall give his whole experience in the kind of work involved and shall give his

whole time to the superintendence of the works. Such Agent or Representative

shall receive on behalf of the Contractor all directions and instructions from the

Project Architect and such directions shall be deemed to have been given to the

Contractor.

E LOCAL REGULATIONS AND BY-LAWS

The Contractor is to comply with all local authority regulations and by-laws

including serving of notices and paying of fees where applicable.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A EXISTING SERVICES

Prior to commencement of any work the Contractor shall ascertain from the

relevant authorities and from a keen observation of the building, the exact

positions, depths and levels of all existing electric cables, water pipes and other

services in the building and shall make whatever provisions may be necessary and

those that may be required by the authorities concerned for the support and

protection of such services. Any damage or disturbance caused to any

service/installation shall be reported immediately to the Project Architect, the

Employer and the relevant authority and shall be made good to their satisfaction at

the Contractor’s expense.

In addition to the above requirement, the Contractor is required to program any

disconnection and reconnection of services in search a manner that it shall not in

any way affect the continuity of the operations of the buildings.

B MATERIALS, TOOLS, PLANT AND SCAFFOLDING

The Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all materials, scaffolding,

tools, plant, transport and workmen required for the works except insofar as may

be stated otherwise herein.

All materials and workmanship used in the execution of the works shall be of the

best quality and description. Any materials condemned by the Project Architect

shall immediately be removed from the site at the Contractor’s cost.

All plant, tools and scaffolding shall comply with all regulations whether general or

local which are in force throughout the period of the contract and shall be altered

or adapted during the contract as may be necessary to comply with any

amendments in or additions to such regulations.

C SUPERVISION

The works shall be executed under the direction and to the entire satisfaction of

the Project Architect who shall, at all times, have access to the works.

D TRANSPORT TO AND FROM THE SITE

The Contractor shall allow in his rates and prices for the transport of materials,

workmen etc., to and from the site for the proposed works, at such hours and by

such routes and means as are permitted by the authorities.

E SECURITY OF THE WORKS

The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the security of all the works, store,

materials, plant and shall provide adequate watching and lighting and other

necessary safeguards to ensure this security and protection.

F PUBLIC AND PRIVATE ROADS, PAVEMENTS ETC.

The Contractor shall make good at his own expense any damage he may cause to

public and / or private roads and pavements in the course of executing this

Contract.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A FAIR WAGES

The Contractor shall pay rates and wages and observe hours and conditions of

labour not less favourable than the minimum rates of remuneration and minimum

conditions of employment applicable within the jurisdiction of the Local Authority as

stipulated by the Minister for Labour.

The Contractor shall comply with the Regulation of Wages and Conditions of

Employment Act, Building and Construction Industry Wages Council.

Should a claim be made to the Employer alleging the Contractor’s default in

payment of Fair Wages of any Workman employed on the Contract and if proof

thereof satisfactory to the Employer is furnished by the Labour Department, the

Employer may, failing payment by the Contractor, pay the claim out of any money

due or which may become due to the Contractor under the Contract.

The Contractor shall furnish to the Project Architect if called upon to do so such

particulars of the rates of wages, hours and conditions of labour referred to above.

B POLICE REGULATIONS

The Contractor shall comply with all instructions and regulations of the police

Authorities and shall pay any fines and costs arising from non-compliance of the

same which may arise in the course of executing this Contract.

C OVERTIME

Unless overtime is directed by the Employer or the Project Architect on his behalf

for reasons other than the Contractor’s own interest to complete the work within

the contract period, the contractor will be responsible for any extra cost arising

there from.

If overtime is worked in accordance with an explicit written instruction issued by

the Project Architect, the Contractor shall be reimbursed in respect of such

overtime to the extent only of the additional NET cost of productive time payable

over and above the basic hourly rates as laid down by the Regulation of Wages

and Conditions of Employment Act, Building and Construction Industry Wages

Council, and excluding any bonuses, profits and overheads.

D ACCESS TO SITE AND TEMPORARY ROADS

The Contractor will be deemed to have inspected the site and all access means

and allowed in his rates or in this clause any costs associated with this item

E LIGHTING AND POWER

The Contractor shall provide at his own risk and cost all artificial temporary lighting

and power for use on the works, including all Sub-Contractors and Specialists

requirements and shall be responsible for all temporary connections, wiring,

fittings, etc. surety and clearing away on completion including paying all fees and

obtaining permits thereof.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A WATER FOR THE WORKS

The Contractor shall provide at his own risk and cost all water for use in

connection with the works (including the work of Sub-Contractors) and pay all

costs and fees in connection therewith.

He shall also provide temporary storage tanks and tubing, etc. as he may consider

necessary and clear away at completion.

All water shall be fresh, clean and pure, free from earthily vegetables or organic

matter, acid or alkaline substances in solution or suspension and shall be tested if

so required by the Architect. The Contractor is advised to investigate the position

of water supply for works and take this into account in his pricing.

B PROGRESS SCHEDULE

Immediately after signing the Contract, the Contractor is to prepare a Time and

Progress Chart showing the time and order in which he proposes to carry out the

works within the total construction time stated in the contract. The chart shall show

in detail the order in which each section, element or activity of the works is to be

carried out.

At the end of each week the Contractor shall mark on the chart in a different colour

the actual time taken to complete the respective stages and sections of the work.

The Contractor shall also show upon the chart or on a different sheet to be made

available to the Project Architect and the Employer the anticipated weekly labour

strength required (divided into labourers and craftsmen) and shall similarly mark up

the actual numbers employed.

The Contractor shall obtain the Project Architect's approval of the chart and then

shall supply copies to the Project Architect, the Quantity Surveyor, the Engineer

and the Employer, and he shall pin one copy upon the site where directed. He

shall thereafter adhere strictly to the approved schedule. In the event of the work

falling behind the approved programme for any reason whatsoever, the Contractor

shall, within a week of the deviation becoming apparent, prepare a revised

schedule showing how lost time would be made up within the overall Contract

Period.

Upon commencement of the works, the contractor shall be required, in addition to

other requirements on the recording of progress contained herein, to compile and

submit to the Project Architect and the Employer Site Weekly reports upon which

shall be recorded daily activities on site including the labour and machinery (if any)

on site, deliveries of materials on site and the extent of work achieved at the close

of the working day. The records shall be filed with the relevant parties not later

than the Wednesday of the subsequent week.

The Contractor is required to execute the work with speed and dispatch to take as

short a time on the project as possible. The Contractor may arrange overtime

working with the Employer to achieve this. Any overtime payments should be

allowed for in the rates and prices. No extra payment beyond the Contract Sum

shall be allowed in connection thereto.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A TEMPORARY STRUCTURES AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS

The Contractor shall provide adequate storage facilities of approved specifications

to the satisfaction of the Project Architect. The facilities shall be for his use and

those of the Sub-contractors

B SANITATION OF THE WORKS

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for sanitary conveniences for his

workmen. Any arrangements so made shall be in conformity with the Public Health

requirements for such facilities. He shall be solely liable for any infringement of the

requirements. At the completion of the Contract this shall be removed and the

ground made good.

C PROTECTING AND CLEANING THE WORK

The Contractor shall cover up and protect all finished work liable to damage

including provision of temporary roofs, gutters, drains, etc., as necessary until the

completion of the works.

In the event of any damage occurring to the works, materials, sewers, drains,

gullies, paths or other works on the site in temporary possession of the contractor

for the purpose of this Contract, either from the weather, want of proper

protection, defects or insufficiency of the works or any other cause whatsoever

during the progress of the works, the Contractor alone shall be responsible and

shall, without extra charge, make good all damage and pay all costs which may be

levied.

D PREVENTION OF NUISANCE

The Contractor shall take all possible precautions to prevent any nuisance,

inconvenience or injury to the occupiers/users of the building generally; users of

the adjacent and neighbouring properties, and to the public, and shall use proper

precautions to ensure the safety of all wheeled traffic and pedestrians.

All work operations which may produce undue levels of noise, dust, vibration,

welding flushes or any other discomfort to the occupiers of the neighbouring

buildings or the general public must be undertaken at suitable times which shall be

determined in close liaison with the Project Architect and the Employer.

In any event the Contractor shall carry out his operations with the utmost care to

avoid noise, dust and any avoidable disturbance to the existing structures and

neighbouring property especially during demolitions.

Any damage caused by his agents, workmen, etc., to the existing structures or

property or any theft or loss of property will solely be his responsibility. The

Contractor shall be responsible for taking all steps to ensure that his workmen,

agents, etc, do not interfere with the property in the proximity of the works.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A PREVENTION OF NOISE

In addition to the above provision on nuisance, the Contractor shall keep the

general noise emanating from the site operations at all times to a level that does

not cause discomfort to the average person. He shall take all necessary measures

to muffle the noise from his tools, equipment and workmen to the reasonable

satisfaction of the Project Architect and the Employer.

B REMOVAL OF PLANT, RUBBISH, ETC.

The Contractor shall, upon completion of the Works, remove and clear away all

plant, rubbish, cans and unused materials, and shall leave the building and

generally the whole of the site of the works in a clean and tidy state to the

satisfaction of the Project Architect and the Employer. During site operations, he

shall also remove from the site all rubbish and dirt as it is produced to maintain the

tidiness of the premises and its immediate environs.

C TRAINING LEVY

The Contractor’s attention is drawn to Legal Notice No. 237 of October 1971,

which requires payment by the Contractor of a Training levy on all contracts of

more than Shs. 50,000.00 in value and he should allow in this section of these Bills

of Quantities for all costs arising or resulting therefrom.

D LABOUR AND PLANT RETURNS

The Contractor shall deliver to the Project Architect detailed weekly returns

showing the supervisory staff and the numbers of the several classes of labour

and plant employed on the Works.

E VISITORS BOOK AND SITE DIARY

The Contractor shall keep on the site a visitors book for recording the names of all

persons who visit the site for the purpose of the project. He shall also maintain on

site a diary in which he shall record site activities on a daily basis and particularly

any occurrence which bears on the progress of the works in any way. The visitors’

book and the diary shall be surrendered to the Project Architect at the completion

of the project or at any other time that the he may direct.

F WARRANTY AND PERFORMANCE STANDARDS

The Contractor shall furnish the Employer with a general written warranty covering

qualities of workmanship, materials and equipment, and be compelled thereby for

a five year period after practical completion of the Contract, except for latent

defects which shall be warranted for ten years. The Contractor must make good,

at his own expense, such repairs and replacements as may be required as a

consequence of negligent workmanship or defective materials. The Contractor

must also procure such warranties and guarantees as described in the

specifications section of these Bills of Quantities and relevant Codes of Practice.

The Contractor must also comply with all tests or materials as required and / or as

directed by the Project Architect.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A SAFETY, HEALTH AND WELFARE OF WORKPEOPLE

The Contractor shall allow for providing for the safety, health and welfare of

workpeople and for complying with any relevant Ordinances, Regulations and

Union Agreements.

B NATIONAL INSURANCE, HEALTH INSURANCE AND PENSIONS

The Contractor shall allow for making any National Social Security Fund and

National Health Insurance Fund payments due in respect of workpeople.

C HOLIDAYS AND TRANSPORT FOR WORK PEOPLE

The Contractor shall allow for providing holidays and transport for workpeople and

for complying with any relevant Ordinances, Regulations or Union Agreement.

D WORKS TO BE DELIVERED UP CLEAN

On completion of the Contract, the site and the works shall be cleared of all plant,

scaffolding, rubbish and unused materials and shall be delivered up clean and in

perfect condition in every respect to the satisfaction of the Project Architect.

Particular attention is to be paid to leaving all windows and floors clean and

removing all paint and cement stains.

E PROTECTION OF WORKS AND PERSONS

The Contractor shall allow for the protection of his own and his Sub-Contractor's

work liable to damage, including provision of temporary roofs, gutters, drains, etc.,

if necessary and shall case-up, cover or in other suitable ways protect all finished

work liable to injury, to the satisfaction of the Project Architect until completion of

the Contract. From the beginning to the completion of the works, the same shall be

under the entire care and control of the Contractor, who shall take all possible

precautions to prevent any nuisance, inconvenience or injury to the holders or

occupiers of surrounding properties and to the public generally, and shall at all

times keep all paths and roads affected by the works in a safe and clear state, and

shall use proper precautions to ensure the safety of all wheeled traffic and

pedestrians.

The Contractor shall allow for providing all watching, lighting, barriers, covering

open trenches and protection of the works, including Sub-Contract works as may

be necessary for the safety of the works and for the protection of the public and his

own and Sub-Contractor's employees. In the event of any damage or loss

occurring to the works or to materials or to any sewers, gullies, drains, paths, or

other works on the site in temporary possession of the Contractor for the purpose

of this Contract either from the weather, want of proper protection, defects, theft,

insufficiency of the works or any other cause whatsoever during the progress of

the works, or for any accident or damage to property or persons by reason of the

said works, the Contractor alone shall be responsible and shall without extra

charge, make good all damage and pay all costs incurred.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A SITE OFFICES

The Contractor must allow for erecting and maintaining on the site in such

positions as may be directed, adequate site offices for the use of his own site staff

and removing the same at completion and making good all surfaces disturbed. The

site office shall be of sufficient size and shall have sufficient furniture to permit the

Project Architect to hold site meetings in it. The Contractor shall also allow for

providing, erecting and maintaining where directed a lock-up hut containing a

pedestal type water closet and wash basin for the sole use of the Project Architect

and other consultants, including making temporary connections to drains and

water supplies and paying all charges for connections, conservancy and water

consumed.

The Contractor shall also allow for providing the services of a sweeper, for keeping

both office and closet in a clean and sanitary condition from the commencement to

the completion of the works; and for dismantling at completion and making good all

disturbed surfaces. The office and closet shall be completed before the contractor

will be permitted to commence the works.

B TELEPHONE

The Contractor shall provide in the offices from the commencement to completion

of the works, telephone facilities and shall pay all the necessary acquistition costs

and rentals, airtime charges etc for the same.

C WORK TO BE OPENED UP AT THE REQUEST OF THE PROJECT ARCHITECT

The Contractor shall, at the request of the Project Architect within such time as the

Project Architect shall name, open for inspection any work covered up, and, should

the Contractor refuse or neglect to comply with such request, the Project Architect

may employ workmen other than those employed by the Contractor to open up the

same. If the said work has been covered up in contravention of the Project

Architect's instructions, or if, on being opened up, it be found not in accordance

with the drawings or Bills of Quantities or the instruction of the Project Architect,

the expenses of opening and covering it up again whether done by the Contractor

or by the Project Architect shall be borne by and be recoverable from the

Contractor or may be deducted from any monies due to the Contractor.

If the work has not been covered up in contravention of such instructions and be

found in accordance with the said drawings and Bills of Quantities, then the

expenses aforesaid shall be borne by the Employer, and be added to the Contract

Sum; provided always that, in the case of foundations or of any other urgent work

so opened up and requiring immediate attention, the Project Architect shall within

a reasonable time after the work has been opened, make or cause to be made the

inspection thereof, and at the expiration of such time, if such inspection shall not

have been made the Contractor may cover up the same and shall not be required

to open it up again for inspection except at the expense of the Employer.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A SHEDS FOR STORAGE OF MATERIALS

The Contractor shall provide, erect and maintain on the site, in such positions as

may be directed, ample temporary watertight, lock-up sheds for the proper storage

and protection of cement and other materials liable to damage, and shall remove

same at completion and make good all surfaces disturbed. He shall also provide

space for storage accommodation which Sub-Contractors may wish to erect for

themselves.

B HOARDING

The Contractor shall allow for providing and clearing away on completion such

hoarding, fencing, fates etc. as may be required for the security of the site and

as instructed by the Project Architect. The exact location of these items are to be

negotiated with the Local Authority by the Contractor who will also be responsible

for paying any fees or taxes in respect of the hoarding, fencing or gates.

The Contractor shall allow for thoroughly maintaining the hoarding and gates

through out the Contract and clearing away and making good disturbed ground on

completion. All materials arising will remain the property of the Contractor and he

should allow credit against this accordingly.

C SCAFFOLDING

The Contractor shall allow for providing, erecting and dismantling all general

scaffolding required for the works. The Contractor must allow here or in his rates

for providing all special scaffolding required by his Sub-Contractors.

D APPROVAL OF PROJECT ARCHITECT FOR EMPLOYMENT OF SUB-

CONTRACTORS

The Contractor will be required to obtain the approval of the Project

Architect/Engineer in writing before employing any Sub-Contractors for any portion

of the work.

E TESTING

Allow for all expenses in connection with the testing of materials as detailed in

specifications and as required by the Project Architect including the supply and

preparation of materials to be tested, the cost of materials and their packing and

conveyance to the nearest approved testing laboratory, laboratory charges, etc.

F WORK RE-MEASUREMENT

All work in this Contract shall be re-measured on completion and a final account of

the contract prepared by the Quantity Surveyor. The contractor will be given the

opportunity to be present for all re-measurements. The final contract sum will be

based on the final re-measurements. The Contractor is therefore cautioned against

using the Bills of Quantities for ordering of materials as the quantities may change

in the course of the CSontract. Neither should the contractor use the Quantities in

the Bills of Quantities for executing work on site. The use of the Bills of Quantities

by the Contractor for the above purposes shall be at the Contractors own risk and

no claims arising from any losses arising therefrom shall be accepted.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A THE STANDARD METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

The following exceptions to the SMM should be noted:

i) Clause D 5 (f) - Working space: for all types of excavations no allowance has

been given for any working space. The contractor will be deemed to have taken

into account for working space where required in his rates for excavations.

B CONTRACTOR

The term “ the Contractor “ wherever used in connection with this Contract shall

mean the person or persons, partnerships, firms or company whose tender (offer)

for the works has been accepted and who has or have consequently entered into a

written Contract with the Employer to carry out the works.

C NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTORS

The Contractor will be required to ensure that all Nominated Sub-Contractors enter

in to the Sub-Contract Agreement issued under the Authority of Kenya Association

of Building and civil Engineering Contracts (KABCEC) and as exemplified or varied

hereafter and he must deposit with the Architect a signed extract of the relevant

details thereof.

Nominated Sub-Contractors and Suppliers

(a) The Contractor will not receive any cash, trade or other discounts on

Prime Cost and Provisional Sums. Any profit in lieu of these discounts

which the contractor desires must be priced by him against the appropriate

item provided in the Bills of Quantities.

(b) When tendering for works covered by Prime Cost and Provisional

Sums the Contractor will be treated as any other Nominal Supplier or Sub-

Contractor.

(c) The Employer reserves the right to pay direct on certification of the

Quantity Surveyor some or all accounts in respect of works and the

Provisional Sums due to Nominated Sub-Contractors or Nominated

Suppliers and to deduct any amounts so paid from any sums

otherwise payable to the Contractor.

Should this reservation be adopted any profits which the Contractor

may have allowed on Prime Cost and Provisional Sums may be

omitted from the contract at the discretion of the Architect.

Direct payment will not be deemed to construe omission of the work

from the Contract and the Contractor will continue to be responsible

for the work or goods in accordance with the terms of the Contract.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A PERFORMANCE BOND

Before acceptance of his tender offer the contractor shall be required to

provide a Performance Bond in amount of 10% being estimated value of

contract sum from approved Bank or Insurance Company for due

performance of this Contract.

Alternatively cash bond deposited with the Client is acceptable.

The Bond is to be forfeited in the event of the Contractor failing to complete the

works in accordance with this Contract.

The Bond will be discharged on the satisfactory completion of this Contract as

certified by the Architect.

Provisions of Clause 16.2 of Conditions of Contract on provision of the

Performance Bond by the Employer shall be deleted.

B CONTRACT DRAWINGS

The drawings from which these Bills of Quantities are prepared both Architectural

and Engineering and contained in the list of drawings in the Appendix of these Bills

of Quantities.

C BILLS OF QUANTITIES

The Bills of Quantities are prepared in accordance with Standard Method of

Measurement for Building Works except where specifically stated otherwise.

D COPYRIGHT

All Drawings, tracings, Prints and specification are the sole property of the

Architect and or Engineer and the copyright of these Bills of Quantities is vested in

the Quantity Surveyor. No part of these documents may be reproduced without

their permission in writing.

At the completion of the job the Contractor is to return to the Architect all drawings

and bearing his name and to the Quantity Surveyor all copies of Bills of Quantities.

E APPENDICES

The appendices to the Bills of Quantities shall be regarded for Contract purposes

as part of the Bills of Quantities and shall be read and construed with the

appropriate sections of the Bills of Quantities as if contained therein.

F AREA TO BE OCCUPIED BY THE CONTRACTOR

The area of the site which may be occupied by the contractor for use of storage

and for the purposes of erecting workshops, etc, shall be defined on the

satisfaction of the Architect.

G WATCHING AND LIGHTING

The Contractor shall provide at his own risk and cost all watching and lighting as

necessary to safeguard the existing buildings, the works, plant and materials

against damage and theft.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A SCAFFOLDING

Where required the Contractor shall provide and erect an approved type of

scaffolding and staging, maintain for the use of all workmen including those of all

Sub-contractors and afterwards dismantle and remove from site.

All scaffolding and staging over two metres in height together with access ladders,

ties to walls and handrails, etc. shall comply in all respects with the Factories

(Building Operations and works of Engineering Construction) rules 1978 and shall

be to the approval of the Chief Inspector of Factories.

B PROVISIONAL SUMS

The term “Provisional Sum “ wherever used in these Bills of Quantities shall have

the meaning stated in A item A7 (i) of the Standard Method of measurement

mentioned in Condition No. 30 of the conditions of contract. Such sums are net

and no additions shall be made to them for profit.

C PRIME COST (OR P.C.) SUMS

The term “Prime Cost “or P.C .Sum” wherever used in these Bills of quantities

shall have the meaning stated in section A item A7 (ii) of the Standard Method of

Measurement mentioned in the Conditions of Contract.

Persons or firms nominated by the Architect to execute work or to provide and fix

materials or goods as stated in the Conditions of Contract are described herein as

Nominated sub-Contractors. Persons or firms so nominated to supply goods or

materials are described herein as Nominated Suppliers.

D DEMOLITIONS OF EXISTING STRUCTURES

All due care shall be taken during demolition of the existing structures and the

works shall be done in close liaison with both the Architect and the Client to

minimise nuisance by noise or dust and damage

E ATTENDANCE UPON NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTORS

The term “Attendance” following P.C sums for nominated Sub-contractors work in

these Bills of Quantities shall be deemed to include both attendance and items of

special attendance.

“Attendance” on Nominated Sub-Contractors shall be given as an item in each

case and shall be deemed to include allowing use of standing scaffolding, mess

rooms, sanitary accommodation and welfare facilities providing office

accommodation and stores for storage of subcontractors plant and materials,

providing light and water for their work, clearing away rubbish,

unloading facilities for storage ( as per specified under “storage of materials” in the

general preliminaries of Bills of Quantities ), hoisting, providing water and power

(as specified under (water and electricity Supply for the Works in the general

preliminaries of the bills of quantities), and removing and replacing dust covers,

pipe casings and the like necessary for the execution and testing of Sub-

Contractors` works providing templates, dimensions and supervision for the

proper carrying out of the Sub-Contractors work and being responsible for the

accuracy of the same.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A DIRECT CONTRACTS

Notwithstanding the foregoing Conditions, the employer reserves the right to place

a “Direct Contract” for any goods or services required in the works which are

covered by P.C Sum in the Bills of Quantities and to pay for the same direct.

In any such instance, profit relative to the P.C Sum in the priced bills of quantities

will be adjusted as described for P.C Sums and allowed.

B ATTENDANCE UPON OTHER TRADESMEN ETC

The Contractor shall allow for the attendances upon other tradesmen and shall

afford such persons employed for the execution of any work not included in this

contract every facility for carrying out their work and also for the use of his ordinary

scaffolding. The contractor however, shall not be required to erect any special

scaffolding for them.

The Contractor shall perform such cutting away for and making good after the

work of such tradesmen or persons as may be ordered by the architect and the

work will be measured and paid for to the extent executed at rates provided in

these Bills.

C SUFFICIENCY OF TENDER

The contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself before tendering as to

the correctness and sufficiency of his tender for the works and of the rates and

prices stated in the priced Bills of quantities which rates and prices shall cover all

his obligations under the contract and all matters and things necessary for the

proper completion and maintenance of the works.

D STAMP CHARGES

The Contractor shall allow for the payment all Stamp Charges in connection with

the Surety Bond and contract Agreement.

E FIGURED DIMENSIONS

Figured dimensions are to be followed in preference to dimensions scaled from the

drawings, but whenever possible dimensions are to be taken on the site or from

the buildings. Before any work is commenced the Sub-contractors or specialists

firms dimensions must be checked on the site and /or buildings and agreed with

the contractor, irrespective of the comparable responsibility for the accuracy of

such dimensions.

F SITE MEETINGS

Site Meetings will be held in the site office at intervals as directed by the Architect

and the contractor will be required to attend and also summon the attendance of

Sub-Contractors and Specialists.

Adequate arrangements must be allowed for with regard to tables, chairs, etc.,

which must be provided by the Contractor.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A TRESPASS, DAMAGE AND CARE OF WORKS

The Contractor shall prevent any trespass on the adjoining property, and he shall

take all reasonable precautions during the progress of the contract to prevent any

damage to the adjoining property or public or private roadways and to prevent

material, plant, rubbish, debris, etc., collecting on the adjoining property of

roadways.

Should the Contractor wish to erect scaffolding on or to make use of adjoining

property he shall obtain prior permission from the Architect and clear away at

completion of his work or when directed and make good any damage to his

satisfaction.

Except as provided for in the conditions of contract, the contractor shall be held

responsible for the care of works generally until their completion, including all

works executed and materials deposited on the site by the himself or Sub-

Contractors or Suppliers together with all risks arising from weather, carelessness

of operatives, damage or loss by theft, or by other cause and he shall make good

all such damage or loss at his own expense.

The Contractor will be responsible for the protection of adjoining buildings,

boundary walls, fences, services either overhead or underground and for the

making good of or paying for all damage thereto, should such be caused in the

course of building operations.

The Contractor shall allow for making good all damage to the roads, kerbs, surface

water channels, etc., occasioned by heavy traffic delivery of materials and building

operations generally, to the entire satisfaction of the Architect.

The Contractor shall also be responsible for observing any Bye-law or Authority

regarding keeping the road free from mud, filth, etc, arising out of the execution of

the works.

The Contractor shall at all times observe any police regulations including those

regarding the loading of or unloading of or waiting by vehicles on the public

highway and the contract sum shall be deemed to include for strict compliance

therewith.

B TREES AND SHRUBS

The Contractor will be responsible for the care and preservation of any trees and

bushes except where expressly stated otherwise by the Architect. In particular they

must be protected from damage, including roots, paint marks, etc.

C TEMPORARY WORKS

The Contractor is to provide all temporary work in the nature of buildings,

scaffolding, roads, services and amenities at his expense and is to remove the

same at completion and make good any disturbed surfaces.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A MATERIALS ON SITE

All materials for incorporation in the works must be stored on or adjacent to the

site before payment is effected unless specifically exempted by the Architect. This

is to include the materials of the Main Contractor, Nominated Sub-Contractors and

Nominated Suppliers.

B GOVERNMENT ACTS AND REGULATIONS

The Contractor will be deemed to have acquired with all Government Acts, Rules

and Regulations including Local Authority Regulations applicable in the area as

regards all aspects of construction including labour regulations, licenses, and

permit which may be required to enable proper execution of this contract.

Contractor’s attention is drawn to the Factories Act and must allow for compliance

with the regulations enacted therein insofar as they are applicable.

Contractor’s attention is also drawn to the by-laws and regulations of the Local

Authority concerning building inspection and approvals and must comply.

C ORDERS FOR MATERIALS

The Contractor will be responsible for placing orders for materials required in this

contract and this applies particularly to all imported materials. Should the

contractor experience any difficulties in placing necessary orders he should at

once inform the Architect who will act accordingly.

D TRAINING LEVY

The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the legal Notice No. 237 of October 1971

which requires payment by the Contractor of a training levy on all contracts of

more than Kshs. 50,000.00 in value and his tender must include for all costs

arising or resulting therefrom.

E TESTING

Allow for testing all installation required to be tested and provide everything

necessary for this purpose and leave in perfect working order to the satisfaction of

the Architect or Local Authority.

Allow for all expenses in connection with testing of the materials as specified

hereunder including the supply and preparation of materials and their packing and

conveyance to the nearest Ministry of Works Testing Laboratory, laboratory

charges etc.

The following items of tests will be measured according to the number of tests

actually called for by the Architect but unsuccessful tests will not be included in the

measurements.

The Architect shall arrange for the testing of such materials as he may at his

discretion deem desirable, but the testing shall be made at the expense of the

Architect and not at the contractor unless the materials fail to pass the test or are

in the opinion of the Architect not in accordance with the Specification, in either

case the contractor shall pay for testing in accordance with the current scale of

testing charges laid down by the Ministry of works.

The Contractor shall allow for all other testing of materials apart from the above,

required by these specifications and he shall be responsible for all expenses

incurred in completing such tests, including costs of labour, materials, equipment,

transport and charges of the testing authority, etc.TOTAL CARRIED TO COLLECTION

Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A RATES FOR ITEMS

Rates for all items unless otherwise described shall include for conveyance and

deliver, unloading, storing, hoisting, and all labour setting, fitting, fixing in position,

straight cutting and waste, return of packages and for all establishment charges,

profits, etc.

B CLEAR RUBBISH

Clear and cut away all rubbish and waste materials including Sub-contractors that

may accumulate from time to time during the progress of the works, and clean the

whole of the works internally and externally at completion.

Allow for cutting out and making out and making good defective work in all trades

and for leaving the whole of the works clean, and perfect at completion to the

satisfaction of the Architect.

C THE STANDARD METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

These Bills of Quantities are prepared in accordance with the standard method of

measurement of Building Works for East Africa (S.M.M.) 1989 Edition metric, with

exception of the following deviations:

i) Attendance clause E.19(a) of the SMM is to read: Attendance on

nominated Sub-contractors shall be given as an item in each case and

shall be deemed to include:

Allowing use of standing scaffolding, messrooms, sanitary

accommodation and welfare facilities, provision of special

scaffolding where necessary, providing space of office

accommodation and for storage of plant and materials

providing light and water for works, clearing away rubbish,

unloading facilities for storage, hoisting, providing electric

power and removing and replacing duct covers, pipe casings

and the like necessary for the execution of sub-contractors

work and be responsible for accuracy of the same.

ii) Disposal of Water

Clause 18(a) and (b) of the SMM are deleted and following

clause is substituted.

Keeping excavations free from all water including spring

and running water shall be deemed to be included in all the

items of excavations.

iii) Planking and Strutting

Clause D19 of the SMM delete the words “shall be given as an

item or” – and the clause will read “ that planking and struting

shall be deemed included in all items of excavations.

iv) Fix only

“Fix only” shall mean take delivery at nearest supply point, pay

demurrage charges, load and transport to site, unload, store,

unpack, assemble as necessary, distribute to position,

hoist and fix only.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


The S M M (Cont'd….)

v) Working Space

The following variation from Clause D 5 (f) of SMM shall be noted

For all times of excavations no allowance has been given for any

working space. The Contractor will be deemed to have taken

account of working space where required in his rates for these

excavations.

A V.A.T PAYMENT

The Contractors attention is drawn to Government requirement with regard to

payment of V.A.T. and the Contractor is to include in his rates for conforming with

these requirements.

B FENCES AND GATES

When existing fences and gates have to be removed or altered for the proper

execution of the works, the Contractor shall at his own expense, erect temporary

fencing and gates and reinstate the same as necessary.

C BUILDING REGULATIONS

All buildings erected by the Contractor upon the Site or the offices or the camp and

the layout of the buildings and the sites shall comply with all the existing laws of

Kenya and all local by-laws in so far as they are applicable.

D FAULTY WORK

Any work which fails to comply with the Specifications shall be rejected and the

Contractor shall, at his own expense, make good any defects, as directed by and

to the satisfaction of the Architect, in accordance with the Contract.

E AS- BUILT DRAWINGS

Following the progress of the works the Contractor is to prepare as-built drawings

were required.

The as-built drawings will be part of the handing over. At this time the as-build

drawings shall be presented for approval.

After approval and corrections, if any, the originals and the number of copies as

requested by the Client are to be supplied to the Employer.

No separate payment will be made to the Contractor for the as-built drawings,

preparation and delivery of the originals and the sets of copies, being their cost

included by the Contractor in the rates of the Bills of Quantities.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A WASTE DISPOSAL

The Contractor shall comply with all government, regional and district regulations

in disposing of waste, garbage, waste water, sewage and any other deleterious

substances including but not limited to petrol, diesel, engine oil, hydraulic and

brake fluid, battery acid and cement.

All waste water and sewerage from office, residential and mobile camps shall be

piped to soak pits or other disposal areas constructed in accordance with local

government regulations, and where and when such regulations require it the

Contractor shall obtain a permit or other appropriate documentation approving the

disposal methods being used.

All used fuels, oils, other plant or vehicle fluid and old tyres and tubes shall be

collected to a central disposal point, on a regular basis and disposed of by burning

in a manner conforming to government regulations and approved by the Engineer.

All household, office, workshop and other solid waste shall be collected to a

central disposal area, on a daily basis and burnt in a manner approved by the

Architect. Any items remaining after burning shall be buried in a disposal pit, the

location, size and depth of which shall be approved by the Engineer.

Servicing of plant, equipment and vehicles shall whenever possible be carried out

at a workshop area. This workshop area shall be equipped with secure storage

areas for fuels, oils and other fluids constructed in such a way as to contain any

spillage’s which may occur, and similar storage where used fluids can be stored

securely prior to their disposal.

When servicing of plant, equipment and vehicles is carried out away from the

workshop area it shall be done at locations and in such a manner as to avoid

spillage and contamination of streams and other drainage courses. Any spillage

shall be cleaned up by either burning in place or collecting the contaminated soils

and burning them at the central disposal area, al to the satisfaction of the

Architect.

On completion of the work on any portion of the project or borrow or gravel pit the

Contractor shall ensure the area is cleaned up and all garbage and other

deleterious materials are removed as described above.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


A SUBMISSION OF SAMPLES

As soon as possible after the Contract has been awarded, the Contractor shall

submit to the Architect a list of the suppliers from whom he proposes to purchase

the materials necessary for the execution of the works.

Samples and details of all the materials proposed for use in the Works, whether

from an outside supplier or supplied by the Contractor from his own resources,

shall be submitted to the Engineer, and shall be tested where required, and

receive his approval prior to the materials being transported to the Site of the

Works. The Contractor shall provide all samples free of charge.

The Contractor’s programme shall allow sufficient time for materials testing and no

claims for delays or extra costs arising out of this will be accepted.

All materials supplied for use in the Works shall conform with the specified

tolerances, to the quality of the approved samples which will be kept at the site

office until the completion of the Contract.

Where a material has been specified by a manufacturer’s trade name, the product

of another manufacturer will be accepted provided that, in the Architects opinion, it

is in all respects of an equivalent or better quality.


Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors


COLLECTION

From Page 1/1

From Page 1/2

From Page 1/3

From Page 1/4

From Page 1/5

From Page 1/6

From Page 1/7

From Page 1/8

From Page 1/9

From Page 1/10

From Page 1/11

From Page 1/12

From Page1/13

From Page 1/14

From Page 1/15

From Page 1/16

From Page 1/17

From Page 1/18

From Page 1/19

From Page 1/20

From Page 1/21

From Page 1/22

From Page 1/23

From Page 1/24

From Page 1/25

From Page 1/26

From Page 1/27

From Page 1/28

TOTAL OF PRELIMINARIES

Carried to Main Summary

Bill No. 1


Quantity Surveyors

BILL NO. TWO (2)

MAIN HOUSE


Quantity Surveyors


Item Description Qnty Unit Rate Amount

ELEMENT NO. 1

SUBSTRUCTURES

All Provisional

The quantities and nature of work indicated are provisional.The actual work done shall be ascertained, valued andadjustments made accordingly. Work measured upto andincluding ground floor slab.

Excavation and Earthworks

AExcavate oversite average 150mm deep to remove vegetablesoil cart and deposit in spoil heaps on site as directed 500 Sm

B Excavate to reduce levels not exceeding 1.50 metres deepfrom stripped levels 222 Cm

C Excavate for column bases commencing at reduced level andnot exceeding 1.50metres deep 66 Cm

2/1Constingconsult LtdQuantity Surveyors

Bill No. 2Main House

C Excavate for column bases commencing at reduced level andnot exceeding 1.50metres deep 66 Cm

D Ditto for wall foundations ditto 216 Cm

E Ditto for lift shaft base ditto 12 Cm

Planking and Strutting

F Allow for maintaining and supporting sides of excavations byprovision of planking and strutting and for keeping the samefree from fallen materials. Item Sum

Keeping excavations free of water

G Allow for keeping excavations free of water (except spring orrunning water) and mud by pumping, baling or other approvedmeans Item Sum

Fillings

H Return, fill and ram selected excavated materials aroundfoundations compacted in layers not exceeding 300mm deep,all to the approval of the Engineer 210 Cm

Carried to collection





Selected imported hardcore filling compacted in layers notexceeding 150mm deep: all to the approval of the Engineer

A Well rammed and consolidated under floors 282 Cm

B 50mm Thick quarry dust blinding to surfaces of hardcore 458 Sm

Disposal of excavated materials

C Load and cart away surplus excavated material from the siteas directed by the Architect 306 Cm

Anti-termite treatment

D Chemical anti-termite treatment executed complete by anapproved specialist under a ten(10) year guarantee tosurfaces of excavations 458 Sm

Concrete Work

E 50mm Thick blinding concrete; plain mix 1:4:8 under wallfoundation 160 Sm



E 50mm Thick blinding concrete; plain mix 1:4:8 under wallfoundation 160 Sm

F Ditto under column bases 43 Sm

G Ditto under lift pit shaft 6 Sm

Insitu concrete grade 25/20 including vibrating aroundreinforcement in

H Wall foundations 32 Cm

I Column bases 17 Cm

J Columns 13 Cm

K 150mm Thick floor slab 458 Sm

L Lift base 2 Cm

M 200mm thick lift shaft walls 11 Sm

N Extra over slab for thicknessing 400mm wide x 100mm thickincluding forming sinking in hardcore 14 Lm






Reinforcement

High tensile steel reinforcemnt to B.S 4449 and B.S 4466

A 8mm Diameter bars 2,098 Kg

B 10mm Diameter bars 1,259 Kg

C 12mm Diameter bars 4,195 Kg

D 16mm Diameter bars 839 Kg

E Mesh reinforcement ref A142 or equal and approvedreinforcement in concrete slab including all necessary tyingand support (No allowance for laps) 458 Sm

Sawn Formwork to: -

F Vertical sides of wall foundations 107 Sm

G Ditto column bases 40 Sm



H Ditto columns 73 Sm

I Ditto lift base 4 Sm

J Ditto lift shaft walls 18 Sm

K Edges of slab and steps 150 - 225m wide 251 Lm

L Ditto but curved to various radii 16 Lm

Damp proof membrane

M 1000 gauge polythene or other equal and approved dampproof membrane laid under surface bed; 300mm side and endlaps 458 Sm

Sub-walling

Load bearing approved natural stone walling, chisel dressed;jointed in cement and sand (1:3) mortar

N 200mm Thick walling 454 Sm

O 12mm Thick cement/sand (1:4) render to plinths 160 Sm

P Approved bituminous paint to rendered surfaces 160 SmCarried to collection





COLLECTION

From Page 2/1

From Page 2/2

From Page 2/3



TOTAL OF SUBSTRUCTURESCarried to Summary of Bill No. 2





ELEMENT NO. 2

REINFORCED CONCRETE SUPERSTRUCTURE

Insitu concrete grade 25/20 including vibrating aroundreinforcement.

A Columns 65 Cm

B Beams 26 Cm

C Ring beams 25 Cm

C Gable beams 11 Cm

D Staircases 9 Cm

E Flower planters (Provisional) 7 Cm

F Gutter beams 14 Cm

H 175mm Thick horizontal suspended slabs 807 Sm



H 175mm Thick horizontal suspended slabs 807 Sm

I 150mm Thick staircase landings 36 Sm

J 200mm Thick lift shaft walls 60 Sm

K 150mm Thick lift shaft cover slab 6 Sm

Reinforcement

High tensile steel reinforcement to B.S 4449 and B.S 4466

L 8mm Diameter bars 9,552 Kg

M 10mm Diameter bars 19,105 Kg

N 12mm Diameter bars 5,732 Kg

O 16mm Diameter bars 3,821 Kg

Sawn Formwork to: -

P Vertical sides of columns 66 Sm

Q Ditto but curved on plan 308 Sm






A Vertical sides of lift shaft walls 120 Sm

B Sides and soffites of beams 285 Sm

C Ditto but curved on plan 48 Sm

D Ditto ring beams 273 Sm

E Ditto but curved on plan 55 Sm

F Soffites of suspended slabs 807 Sm

G Soffites of top cover lift slab 6 Sm

H Sides and soffites of gutter beams 180 Sm

I Ditto gable beams sloping over 15 degrees from thehorizontal 25 Sm

J Extra over formwork to fascia beams for the decorativemoulds 15 Lm

K Sloping soffites of staircases 20 Sm



L Soffites of landings 36 Sm

M Edge of risers 150 - 225mm wide 126 Lm

N Open string extreme width 325mm 13 Lm


COLLECTION

From Page 2/5

From Above

TOTAL OF R.C. SUPERSTRUCTURECarried to Summary of Bill No. 2





ELEMENT NO. 3

WALLING

Bituminous based damp proof course

A 150mm wide 14 Lm

B 200mm wide 249 Lm

External Walls

Selected cut and natural colour quarry stone walling beddedand jointed in cement and sand (1:4) mortar and finished fairboth faces

C 200mm Thick walling 680 Sm

D Extra over walling for raking cutting 86 Lm

Internal Walls



Machine cut natural stone walling bedded and jointed incement/sand (1:4) mortar; raking where necessary

E 100mm Thick walling 11 Sm

F 150mm Thick walling 41 Sm

G 200mm Thick walling 895 Sm

H Ditto but curved on plan 108 Sm

I Extra over walling for raking cutting 95 Lm

J 300 x 75mm Average thick precast concrete coping tapered;bedded and pointed in cement and sand (1:4) mortar(provisional) 24 Lm

K 12mm Thick render and approved waterproofing to internalsurfaces of flower planter walls 30 Sm






Sprandel Walls


A 200mm Thick walling 3 Sm

B Ditto but curved on plan 12 Sm

C 300 x 75mm Average thick precast concrete coping tapered;bedded and pointed in cement and sand (1:4) mortar(provisional) 50 Lm

Fire place

D Construct complete 200mm thick masonry fire placecomprising 350x350mm flue with precast concrete cap; lintelsand decorative mouldings and corbel and cill; hearth finishedin fine chisel dressed stone; sides finished in fire brick lining;front and sides cladded with mazeras stone all to Architectsdetails - refer drawing 1 No





COLLECTION

From Page 2/7

From Above

TOTAL OF WALLINGCarried to Summary of Bill No. 2





ELEMENT NO. 4

ROOF CONSTRUCTION AND COVERING

Sawn cypress;second grade; clean; well seasoned andtreated with approved wood preservative; pressure-impregnated with celcure 'A' with and including all jointing andconnections (packing piece, bolts etc) as necessary; in roofapproximately 10,000mm high.

A 150 x 50mm Rafters in trusses 558 Lm

B 150 x 50mm Ceiling joists ditto 406 Lm

C 100 x 50 mm Struts and ties ditto 423 Lm

D 150 x 50mm Common rafters 622 Lm

E 150x50mm Hip and valley rafters 324 Lm

F 150 x 50mm Purlins 234 Lm

G 150 x 25mm Scarf joints and splices 332 Lm



G 150 x 25mm Scarf joints and splices 332 Lm

H 200 x 50mm; Ridge piece 54 Lm

I 100 x 50mm Wall plate; fixed to concrete or masonary withand including approved bolts or 6 gauge galvanised mild steelhoop iron at 1000mm centres 192 Lm

ROOF COVERING

Decra roofing tiles; approved colour supplied by Space andStyle (k) Ltd or other equal and approved; laid and fixed inaccordance with the manufacturer's instructions

J Roof covering including all necessary fixtures 564 Sm

K Ridge/Hip cap 308 Lm

Galvanized sheets

L Flat metal sheet flashings; 26 gauge; 400mm wide; one edgebend and built into wall 10 Lm

M Flat metal sheet valley flashings; 26 gauge; 600mm wide;bending and fixing under tiles 90 Lm






Rainwater Goods

A 100x100mm Prepainted metal rain water downpipe;holderbats at 1500mm (maximum) centres 206 Lm

B Extra over ditto for 800 mm swan neck offset 45 No

C Ditto for shoe 45 No

Eaves Covering

D 100x15mm Thick Wrot prime grade cypress board to eaves;T & G joints; nailed on and including 50x50mm brandering at600mm centres both ways 155 Sm

E Upvc fascia or berge board as from Space and Style Ltd fixedin accordance with the manufacturer's instructions(Provisional) 120 Lm

Cement and sand plaster, as described finished with woodfloat to

F Gable surfaces to receive paint; 15mm thick 11 Sm



Prepare and apply Duracoat 100% pure Acrylic outdoorprotector paint in accordance with the manufacturer'sinstructions to:

G Rendered concrete gable surfaces externally 11 Sm


COLLECTION

From Page 2/9

From Above

TOTAL OF ROOF CONSTRUCTION AND COVERINGCarried to Summary of Bill No. 2





ELEMENT NO. 5

WINDOWS

Approved precast concrete cill; bedded and jointed incement/sand (1:3) mortar; pointed in matching colouredcement.

A 200mm wide x 25mm Thick cill 111 Lm

Wrot cypress; prime grade

B Pelmet box 150 x 20mm top; 200 x 20mm fascia; 50 x 40mmcypress bearer; 20 x 150mm return ends 241 Lm

C "Silent Gliss" Aluminium curtain rail complete with rollers andfixing brackets 482 Lm

Prepare surfaces; apply undercoat and two finishing coatsfirst grade clear polyurethane varnish as "crown paints" orother equal approved; on wood surfaces:



D Surfaces over 100 but not exceeding 200mm wide 241 Lm

Steel casement window; purpose made standard metalcasement sections complete with Zed sections; permanentventilators comprising 'T' bar gauze and metal hood;openable casements; coupling mullions; approvedironmongery; as per schedule. Pattern as shown in theAppendix to Architects approval

E Window size 800 x 1000mm high overall 8 No

F Window size 600 x 1000mm high overall 10 No

G Window size 2100 x 1800mm high ditto 11 No

H Window size 1200 x 1800mm high ditto 13 No

I Window size 3450 x 1950mm high ditto; but curved onelevation 9 No

J Ditto 3000 x 1950mm high ditto; but curved on elevation 2 No

K V-shaped window size 3200 x 4000mm high overall 1 No

L V-shaped window size 4150 x 3000mm high overall 4 No

Carried to Collection





A V-shaped window size 1500 x 1100mm high overall 2 No

Burglar Proofing

BMild steel burglar proofing grille in heavy gauge sections bentand welded into an approved pattern including priming, fixingand finishing to Architect's detail (provisional) 95 Sm

6mm Thick clear sheet glass and glazing to steel casementwindow with and including linseed putty; in

C Panes of various sizes 203 Sm

6mm Thick obscured sheet glass and glazing to steelcasement window with and including linseed putty; in

D Panes of various sizes 6 Sm

Prepare metal surfaces; apply undercoat and two finishingcoats first grade eggshell paint; as "Crown paints" or otherequal approved metallic paint on metal surfaces to



E General surfaces; window and burglarproofing grillesinternally (measured flat overall) 209 Sm

F General surfaces; windows externally (measured flat overall)209 Sm


COLLECTION

From Page 2/11

From Above

TOTAL OF WINDOWSCarried to Summary of Bill No. 2





ELEMENT NO. 6

DOORS

Aluminium Doors

Supply and fix anodised Aluminium doors; 100x50mm framesincluding all necessary glazing beadings, openingaccessories, sliding gear where necessary, infilled with andincluding 6mm thick tinted glass, oiling and adjusting oncompletion;

A Door size 1200 x 2400mm high in two leaves, a fanlight300mm high; c/w all necessary ironmongery 6 No

Panel Doors

Wrot mahogany panel doors

B 45mm Thick solid panel single leaf door overall size 900 x2550mm high comprising 150 x 50mm rebated stiles, middlerails, 100 x 50mm bottom and top rails and infilled withmoulded solid hardwood panels; all framed and finished toArchitect's detail 33 No



B 45mm Thick solid panel single leaf door overall size 900 x2550mm high comprising 150 x 50mm rebated stiles, middlerails, 100 x 50mm bottom and top rails and infilled withmoulded solid hardwood panels; all framed and finished toArchitect's detail 33 No

C Ditto double leaf door overall size 1500 x 2400mm high ditto3 No

Flush Doors

45mm Thick door with mahogany veeneer; hardwood lippededges; moulded beading to both sides;

D 900 x 2100mm high; semi-solid cored flush door 20 No

Frames selected; in wrot mahogany

E 225x50mm with two labours 307 Lm

F Ditto rebated transome with two labours 18 Lm

G 60x20mm Ditto moulded architraves 614 Lm

H 60x15mm Ditto glazing beading 37 Lm





Item Description Qnty Unit Rate AmountDoors (cont'd)

A Pelmet box; 100x25mm top, 125x25mm moulded fascia,50x25mm cypress bearer and 100x125x25mm blocked endsincluding double heavy duty aluminium curtain rail as "SilentGliss" complete with rollers and fixing brackets 30 Lm

Ironmongery

Supply and fix English "Union" or other equal approvedironmongery; matching screws; locks to include a set of 3keys,

B Three lever mortice lock; rebated and complete with a set ofbrass lever handle furniture fixed to timber door 3 No

C Two lever mortice lock; rebated and complete with a set ofbrass lever handle furniture fixed to timber door 33 No

D Two lever mortice lock; complete with a set of brass leverhandle furniture fixed to timber door 20 No

E 38mm diameter rubber door stops No. 8400 to concrete orblockwork fixing with screws; plugging 71 No



E 38mm diameter rubber door stops No. 8400 to concrete orblockwork fixing with screws; plugging 71 No

F 100 mm Long brass butt hinges 89 Prs

G Approved door closers 8 No

H Approved stainless steel door pull handles 6 No

I 800 x 200mm High aluminium kick plate 10 No

J Provide the Provisional Sum of One Hundred Thousand for(100,000/=) Special Ironmongery to be omitted or expendedin whole or in part at the discretion of the Architect

Item Sum 100,000.00

Glass

K 4mm Thick clear sheet glass in 0.1 to 0.5m2 panes andglazing to timber with beads (m/s) 8 Sm

L 12mm Thick anti-bandit glass panes and glazing to timberwith beads (m/s) 3 Sm






Painting and Decorating

One undercoat two finishing coats clear polyurethanevarnish; to Basco duracoat paints or equal and approved onwood surfaces

A General surfaces of doors 222 Sm

B Not exceeding 200 - 300mm girth internal 19 Lm

C Prepare and prime back of frame before fixing 306 Lm


COLLECTION

From Page 2/13

From Page 2/14



From Above

TOTAL OF DOORSCarried to Summary of Bill No 2





ELEMENT NO. 7

FINISHES

Floor Finishings

Cement and sand (1:4) screed to floor: in

A 32mm Thick finished to receive ceramic tiles 234 Sm

B 25mm Thick finished to receive wood blocks 772 Sm

C 25mm Thick finished to receive rubber tiles 30 Sm

D 40mm Thick paving finished smooth with steel trowel toreceive carpet 101 Sm

300 x 300 x 8mm Approved coloured NON-SLIP glazedceramic floor tiles as 'Saj Ceramics' or other equal andapproved; to regular pattern; grouting joints in matchingcement; to



E Floors; on level screed (m/s) 234 Sm

F 100mm High skirting 352 Lm

G Ditto skirting; but curved on plan 31 Lm

20mm Thick approved Wood block flooring in wroughthardwood; on screed backing, with approved adhesive; toregular pattern; including machine sanding to

H Floors; on level screed (m/s) 772 Sm

Wrot mahogany; prime grade; 25mm thick skirting; onerounded junction with wall finish; one coved junction with floorfinish; counter sinking and flush pelleting

I 100mm High skirting 590 Lm

J Ditto skirting; but curved on plan 100 Lm

Prepare surfaces; one coat multi purpose PVA clear sealer;three coats gloss two pack epoxy varnish in "Crown paint" orequal approved; on wood to

K Wood block floor finish; surfaces generally 772 SmCarried to collection





A Skirting over 100 but not exceeding 200mm girth 690 Lm

Specialized Rubber Tiles

Allow a Prime Cost rate of Kshs. 6,000 per square metreinclusive of VAT for purchase; include rate for take deliveryand fix only to

B Floors; on level screed (m/s) with approved adhesive 30 Sm

Wrot mahogany; prime grade

E 100 x 25mm skirting; one rounded junction with wall finish;one coved junction with floor finish; counter sinking and flushpelleting 22 Lm

Carpet

Allow a Prime Cost rate of Kshs. 6,000 per square metreinclusive of VAT for purchase; include rate for take deliveryand fix only to

D Floors; on level screed (m/s) with approved adhesive 101 Sm



D Floors; on level screed (m/s) with approved adhesive 101 Sm

Wrot mahogany; prime grade

E 100 x 25mm skirting; one rounded junction with wall finish;one coved junction with floor finish; counter sinking and flushpelleting 68 Lm

F Ditto 100mm high skirting; curved on plan 7 Lm

Prepare surfaces; one coat multi purpose PVA clear sealer;three coats gloss oil paint in "Crown paints" or other andequal approved; on wood to

G Skirting over 100 but not exceeding 200mm girth 75 Lm

Wall Finishes Externally


H Wall surfaces to receive paint; 15mm thick 577 Sm

Prepare and apply Duracoat 100% pure Acrylic outdoorprotector paint in accordance with the manufacturer'sinstructions to:

I Rendered wall surfaces externally (Provisional) 100 Sm






A Supply and fix approved precisely cut mazeras slatescladding; approved pattern to walls including backing 118 Sm

B Prepare surfaces and apply Wall Master by an approvedSupplier 477 Sm

Wall Cladding

Selected smooth facing brick walling in cement/sand (1:3)mortar and grouted up;pointed with neat recessed joints to

C 50mm Thick walling externally 34 Sm

Prepare, touch up one skim coat and two misty universalundercoat and apply two coats of weather resistant exteriorbrick paint in accordance with the manufacturer's instructionsto:

D Surfaces of brick wall cladding externally 34 Sm

Wall Finishes Internally

12mm Thick plaster in cement/sand floated with a steeltrowel; to block walls and concrete surfaces in:-



12mm Thick plaster in cement/sand floated with a steeltrowel; to block walls and concrete surfaces in:-

E Wall surfaces internally 1,996 Sm

Prepare surfaces and apply undercoat and two finishingcoats of silk vinyl emulsion paint on plastered masonry orconcrete surfaces in:-

F Wall surfaces internally 1,996 Sm

12 mm cement and sand backing to

G Receive wall tiles 672 Sm

6mm Thick coloured glazed ceramic tiles from 'Tile andCarpet' to regular pattern; bedding and jointing in cementmortar (1:4) grouting joints with matching cement

H To wall; grouting edges with matching cement 672 Sm

Ceiling Finishes

I12mm Thick gypsum boards on and including 50x50mmtreated cypress brandering on at 600mm centres both ways 360 Sm






A Ditto but suspended on and including 16mm diameter barssupport system, complete including all decorative moulding,curved cutting, etc. to Architect's detail 712 Sm

B 100mm Moulded gypsum cornice (provisional) 1,147 Lm

Prepare surfaces and apply undercoat and two finishingcoats plastic emulsion paint as "Crown Paints" or other equalapproved on plastered masonry or concrete surfaces; to

C Gypsum plasterboard ceiling surfaces 1,072 Sm

D 100mm Moulded gypsum cornice (provisional) 1,147 Lm

Staircase Finishes

Cement and sand (1:4) screed to landing; in

E 25mm Thick finished to receive wood blocks 36 Sm

20mm Thick approved Wood block flooring as beforedescribed



20mm Thick approved Wood block flooring as beforedescribed

F Floors; on level screed (m/s) 36 Sm

G Ditto to 250mm wide treads 120 Lm

H Ditto to 150mm high risers with rounded top and coved atjunctions 126 Lm

I Ditto to open string average 325mm wide 13 Lm

Staircase Balustrading

J 900mm High balustrading comprising 75mm diameterstainless steel handrail on 50mmx50mm SHS stainless steelmoulded balusters at approximately 250mm centres; 6Nomiddle rails; to profile of staircase; all to detail - see Appendix

48 Lm

K Ditto but curved on plan 44 Lm

L 75mm Diameter polished brass handrail; including curvedsections fixed to wall with and including 25mm diameterstainless steel brackets 50mm long grouted to wall 95 Lm






Balcony Balustrading

A 900mm High balustrading comprising 75mm diameterstainless steel handrail on 50mmx50mm SHS stainless steelmoulded balusters at approximately 250mm centres; 6Nomiddle rails; to profile of staircase; all to detail - see Appendix

10 Lm

B Ditto but curved on plan 41 Lm

C 75mm Diameter polished brass handrail; including curvedsections fixed to wall with and including 25mm diameterstainless steel brackets 50mm long grouted to wall 51 Lm


COLLECTION

From page 2/16



From page 2/17

From page 2/18

From page 2/19

From Above

TOTAL OF FINISHESCarried to Summary of Bill No 2





ELEMENT NO. 8

JOINERY FITTINGS AND FIXTURES

Kitchen Worktops and Cabinets

A Provide the Provisional Sum of Kshs. Six Hundred Thousand(600,000/=) only for Kitchen Worktops and Cabinets to beomitted or expended in whole or in part at the discretion of theArchitect Item 600,000.00

B Provide the Provisional Sum of Kshs. Five Hundred Thousand(500,000/=) only for Wardrobes to be omitted or expended inwhole or in part at the discretion of the Architect

Item 500,000.00

Plinths for Kitchen Cabinets and Wardrobes

C 100mm Thick mass concrete mix 1:3:6 in plinth 36 Sm

D Formwork to edges of slab 75 - 150mm high 60 Lm

E 15mm cement screed floor on plinth top and sides finishedsmooth with trowel 36 Sm



E 15mm cement screed floor on plinth top and sides finishedsmooth with trowel 36 Sm

F Allow for Builders work, Profit and attendance in connectionwith Joinery Fittings Item

Sauna

G Provide for seats/benches in wrot cedar slats 50x50mm withtwo labours, bearers and legs overall 11,000x1200mm wide x450mm high 1 No

Bathrooms

H Wash Hand Basin Vanity tops overall size 3000x500mm wide;50mm thick concrete worktop finished with granite top andfascia; all with beveled edges 1 No

I Ditto but size 1500x500mm wide 4 No

TOTAL OF JOINERY FITTINGSCarried to Summary of Bill No 2





ELEMENT NO. 9

ENTRANCE CANOPIES

Substructures (All Provisional)

The quantities and nature of work indicated are provisional.The actual quantities of work done shall be ascertained,valued and adjustments made accordingly.


A Excavate to reduce levels not exceeding 1.50 metres deepfrom stripped levels 66 Cm

B Excavate for column bases not exceeding 1.50 metres deepfrom stripped levels 3 Cm

Selected imported hardcore filling compacted in layers notexceeding 150mm deep

C Well rammed and consolidated under floors to the approval ofthe Engineer 54 Cm



C Well rammed and consolidated under floors to the approval ofthe Engineer 54 Cm

D 50mm Thick quarry dust blinding 82 Sm


E Load and cart away surplus excavated materials 69 Cm


F Approved Chemical anti-termite treatment executed under aten(10) year guarantee 40 Sm

Plain concrete class 15/20

G 50mm Thick blinding concrete under column bases 3 Sm


H Column bases 2 Cm

I Columns 1 Cm

J 150mm Thick floor slab including jointing to existing slab asnecessary 24 Sm

K 150mm Thick ramp with tamped finish 2 Sm






High tensile steel reinforcement to B.S 4449 and 4466

A Assorted bars 300 Kg

B Mesh reinforcement ref A142 or equal and approvedreinforcement in concrete slab including all necessary tyingand support (No allowance for laps) 82 Sm

Damp proofing membrane

C 1000 Gauge polythene sheeting laid on blinded hardcoreincluding all necessary laps 82 Sm

Sawn Formwork to: -

D Edges of floor slab 225 - 300mm high 19 Lm

E Sides of column bases and columns 10 Sm

Superstructure

Insitu vibrated concrete as before described in;

F Steps 2 Cm



F Steps 2 Cm

G Columns 2 Cm

H Gutter beams 2 Cm

Steel reinforcement as before described

I Assorted bars 1,500 Kg

Sawn Formwork to: -

J Sides of ramp 1 Sm

K Columns curved on plan 9 Sm

L Sides and soffits of gutter beams 95 Sm

M Edge of risers 150 - 225mm wide 15 Lm

N Open string extreme width 330mm 1 Lm

Precast Concrete Coping

O 300 x 75mm Average thick precast concrete coping tapered;bedded and pointed in cement and sand (1:4) mortar(provisional) 28 Lm






Roof Construction and Covering

APerspex waterproof cover supplied by an approved specialist 28 Sm

The following in mild steel to BS5950; all welding to BS5135,Grade 4.6 bolts and nuts to BS4360; making small holes;priming and connections to the approval of the Engineer

B 50x50x3mm RHS curved girders spray painted to theapproval of the Architect 81 Lm

C 25x25x2mm RHS struts spray painted to the approval of theArchitect 42 Lm

Rainwater Goods

D 75mm Diamenter PVC rain water downpipe; in columnsincluding bends and other fittings 7 Lm

E Approved cast iron fulbora; 100mm diameter 2 No

F Approved EPDM membrane or other equal and approvedwaterproofing to screeded surfaces of gutters; all applied inaccordance with manufacturer's instructions 42 Sm



F Approved EPDM membrane or other equal and approvedwaterproofing to screeded surfaces of gutters; all applied inaccordance with manufacturer's instructions 42 Sm

G 25mm cement/sand screed protection over waterproofing laidto slope 42 Sm

Finishes

Cement and sand (1:4) screed to floors: in

H 32mm Thick finished to receive ceramic tiles 25 Sm


I Wall surfaces to receive paint; 15mm thick 22 Sm

Approved coloured NON-SLIP glazed ceramic floor tiles as'Saj Ceramics' or other equal and approved; to regularpattern; grouting joints in matching cement; to

J Floors; on level screed (m/s) 25 Sm

Painting and decorating

K Wall Master rendering to masonry or concrete surfaces 22 Sm






COLLECTION

From Page 2/22

From Page 2/23

From Page 2/24

SUB-TOTAL FOR ONE (1) NO. CANOPY



TOTAL FOR 3NO. ENTRANCE CANOPIESCarried to Main Summary





SUMMARY

BILL NO. 2

MAIN BUILDING BLOCK

FromPage

1 SUBSTRUCTURES 2/4

2 R. C SUPERSTRUCTURE 2/6

3 WALLING 2/8

4 ROOF CONSTRUCTION AND COVERING 2/10



5 WINDOWS 2/12

6 DOORS 2/15

7 FINISHES 2/20

8 JOINERY FITTINGS AND FIXTURES 2/21

9 ENTRANCE CANOPIES 2/25

TOTAL OF MAIN BUILDING BLOCKCARRIED TO MAIN SUMMARY



DOMESTIC SERVANT QUARTERS

BILL NO. THREE (3)


Quantity Surveyors


Item Description Qty Unit Rate Amount

ELEMENT NO. 1

SUBSTRUCTURES

All Provisional

The quantities and nature of work indicated are provisional.The actual work done shall be ascertained, valued andadjustments made accordingly. Work measured upto andincluding ground floor slab.


A Excavate oversite average 150mm deep to remove vegetablesoil cart and deposit in spoil heaps on site as directed 109 Sm

B Excavate to reduce levels not exceeding 1.50 metres deepfrom stripped levels 66 Cm

C Ditto for wall foundation ditto. 48 Cm

D Extra over excavation for excavating at any point in rock (noblasting allowed) 4 Cm

Planking and strutting

3/1Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity SurveyorsBill No. 3Servant Quarters


E Allow for maintaining and supporting sides of excavations byprovision of planking and strutting and for keeping the samefree from fallen materials. Item Sum


F Allow for keeping excavations free of water (except spring orrunning water) and mud by pumping, baling or other approvedmeans Item Sum

Fillings

Selected excavated materials compacted in layers notexceeding 300mm deep: all to the approval of the Engineer

G Around foundations 31 Cm

Selected imported hardcore filling compacted in layers notexceeding 150mm deep: all to the approval of the Engineer

H Well rammed and consolidated under floors to the approval ofthe Engineer 76 Cm

I 50mm Thick quarry dust blinding 82 Sm






A Load and cart away surplus excavated material from the site asdirected by the Architect 87 Cm


B Chemical anti-termite treatment executed complete by anapproved specialist under a ten(10) year guarantee to surfacesof excavations 100 Sm

Concrete Work

C 50mm Thick blinding concrete; plain mix 1:4:8 under wallfoundation 49 Sm

Reinforced concrete


D Wall foundation 10 Cm

E 150mm Thick floor slab 98 Sm

Reinforcement



Reinforcement

High tensile steel reinforcemnt to B.S 4449 and 4466

F 8mm Diameter bars 156 Kg

G 10mm Ditto 344 Kg

H Mesh reinforcement ref A142 or equal and approvedreinforcement in concrete slab including all necessary tyingand support (No allowance for laps) 98 Sm

Sawn Formwork to: -

A Vertical sides of wall foundation 32 Sm

B Edges of slab 75 - 150mm wide 55 Lm

Damp proof membrane

C 1000 gauge polythene or other equal and approved damp proofmembrane laid under surface bed; 300mm side and end laps

98 Sm


D 200mm Thick walling 137 Sm





Plinths

E 12mm Thick cement/sand (1:4) render to plinths 17 Sm

F Approved bituminous paint to rendered surfaces 17 Sm


COLLECTION

From Page 3/1

From Page 3/2

From Above







ELEMENT NO. 2


Vibrated Reinforced Concrete


A Beams 7 Cm

B Gutter beams 5 Cm

C Columns 1 Cm

Reinforcement


D 8mm Diameter bar 829 Kg

E 12mm Diameter bar 1,121 Kg

Formwork

Sawn Formwork to: -



Sawn Formwork to: -

F Sides and soffites of beams 138 Sm

G Sides of columns; curved on plan 3 Sm

TOTAL OF R.C. SUPERSTRUCTURECarried to Summary of Bill No. 3




ELEMENT NO. 3

WALLING

External Walls


A 200mm wide 71 Lm

Selected cut and natural colour quarry stone walling beddedand jointed in cement and sand (1:4) mortar; both sidesfinished to receive plaster

B 200mm Thick walling 109 Sm

C Extra over external stone wall for bush hammered coynes toedges in alternating lengths of 200 and 100mm on both sidesof the edge 33 Lm

Internal Walls






TOTAL OF WALLING Carried to Summary of Bill No. 3




ELEMENT NO. 4


Sawn cypress;second grade; clean; well seasoned and treatedwith approved wood preservative; pressure- impregnated withcelcure 'A' with and including all jointing and connections(packing piece, bolts etc) as necessary; in roof approximately3,200mm high.

The following in trusses and/or independent members

A 150 x 50mm Rafters 318 Lm

B Ditto ceiling joists 93 Lm

C Ditto purlins 92 Lm

D Ditto ridges 12 Lm

E 100x50mm Struts 202 Lm

F 100 x 50mm Wall plate; fixed to concrete or masonry with andincluding approved bolts at 1000mm centres 51 Lm

ROOF COVERING



ROOF COVERING

Decra roofing tiles supplied by Space and Style (k) ltd or otherequal and approved; laid and fixed in accordance with themanufacturer's instructions and to Architect's approval

G Roof covering including all necessary fixtures 146 Sm

H Ridge or hip covering 58 Lm

I Galvanized metal sheet valley flashings; 26 gauge; 450mmwide; bending one edge build into wall and grouting toArchitect's approval 9 Lm

Roof Vents

J Roof vent, triangular in shape comprising 100x50mm treatedcypress framing and t&g boarding overall size 2000x800mmhigh 2 No

Rainwater Goods

Prepainted galvanized metal; 18 gauge

K 100x100mm Rain water downpipe; holderbats at 1500mm(maximum) centres 18 Lm

L Extra over ditto for 800 mm swan neck offset 6 No





A Ditto for shoe 6 No

Waterproofing to RC gutters (PROVISIONAL)

B 4mm Thick APP waterproofing membrane laid in accordancewith the manufacturer's specifications to slope includingdressing up as skirting 200mm high, 15mm thick cement/sandbacking and all necessary outlets and sleeves 42 Sm

Eaves covering (provisional)

E 25mm Thick first grade cypress t&g to eaves; nailed on andincluding 50 x 50mm brandering at 600mm centres both ways

42 Sm

Prepare surfaces and apply undercoat and two finishing coatsof approved wood varnish; to

F General surfaces 42 Sm

G uPVC fascia or berge board as from Space and Style Ltd fixedin accordance with the manufacturer's instructions 17 Lm




COLLECTION

From Page 3/6

From Above

TOTAL OF ROOF CONSTRUCTION AND COVERINGCarried to Summary of Bill No. 3




ELEMENT NO. 5

WINDOWS

Approved red clay tile cill; bedded and jointed in cement/sand(1:3) mortar; pointed in matching coloured cement.

A 150 x 100 x 25mm Thick cill 12 Lm

Window board

B 125 x 25mm Wrot mahogany window board, moulded 8 Lm

Prepare surfaces; apply undercoat and two finishing coatspolyurethane varnish on wood surfaces: to

C Surfaces over 100 but not exceeding 200mm wide 8 Lm

Supply, assemble and fix the following purpose-made "Z"section steel casemnt windows to comply to B.S. 990,obtained from an approved manufacturer, primed with redoxide primer before delivery to site complete with hinges,handles, catches and building in lugs

D Window size 1500 x 1500mm high overall 1 No




E Window size 600 x 900mm high overall 1 No

Glazing

4mm Thick clear sheet glass and glazing to steel casementwindow with and including linseed putty;

F In panes; various sizes 13 Sm

5mm Thick obscured sheet glass and glazing to steelcasement window with and including linseed putty;

G In panes; various sizes 3 Sm

Prepare surfaces; apply undercoat and two finishing coats firstgrade eggshell paint on metal surfaces to

H General surfaces; window and burglarproofing grilles internally(measured flat overall) 16 Sm

I General surfaces; windows externally ditto 16 Sm





ELEMENT NO. 6

DOORS

Panel doors

A 45mm Thick solid mahogany panel door overall size 950 x2100mm high comprising 100 x 45mm rebated stiles, middleand top rails, 150 x 45mm bottom rail and infilled with mouldedsolid panels all framed and fixed together and finished toarchitects satisfaction 2 No

Flush doors

45mm Thick mahogany veneer faced flush door; hardwoodlipped edges; with planted moulding to architects details

B 900 x 2100mm Door; solid cored with thin aluminium metalsheet flashing internally 2 No

C 800 x 2050mm Door; semi-solid cored 2 No

Wrot mahogany; prime grade; three labours



D 225 x 50mm Door frame; rebated; plugged 11 Lm

E 125 x 50mm Door frame; rebated; plugged 21 Lm

F 38 x 25mm architrave 32 Lm

G 20mm Quadrant 32 Lm

Prepare surfaces and apply one coat (undercoat) and twocoats first grade clear polyurethane varnish as "Crown paints"or other equal approved; on wood surfaces to

H Door; general surfaces 23 Sm

I Surfaces over 200mm but not exceeding 300mm girth; frame;architrave and quadrant 32 Lm

Ironmongery

Supply and fix English "Union" or other equal approvedironmongery; matching screws; locks to include a set of 3keys, catalogue numbers refer to the "Union catalogue issuedby "Josiah parkes & Sons limited" of the United Kingdom;available from their authorized local dealers

J Three lever mortice lock; complete with a set of brass leverhandle furniture fixed to timber door 2 No





A Two lever mortice lock; complete with a set of brass leverhandle furniture fixed to timber door 4 No

B 38mm diameter rubber door stops No. 8400 to concrete orblockwork fixing with screws; plugging 6 No

C 100 mm Long brass butt hinges 9 Prs


COLLECTION

From Page 3/9

From Above



TOTAL OF DOORSCarried to Summary of Bill No. 3




ELEMENT NO. 7

FINISHES

Floor Finishings



Allow a prime cost rate of Kshs. 1,200 per square metreinclusive of VAT for purchase; include rate for take deliveryand fix only

B Floor tiles; on level screed (m/s) 82 Sm

C 100mm High skirting 71 Lm

Wall finishes

Cement and sand (1:4) to walls in

D 12mm Thick render to receive ceramic tiles 41 Sm

300 x 250 x 6mm Coloured glazed ceramic tiles as 'SajCeramics' to regular pattern; bedding and jointing in cementmortar (1:4) grouting joints with matching cement



300 x 250 x 6mm Coloured glazed ceramic tiles as 'SajCeramics' to regular pattern; bedding and jointing in cementmortar (1:4) grouting joints with matching cement

E To wall; grouting edges 41 Sm

Plaster 9mm first coat of cement/lime putty/sand (1:2:9):3mmsecond coat of cement/lime putty/sand (1:1:6): steel troweled;on masonry or concrete: to

F Walls; internally 216 Sm

Prepare surfaces and apply undercoat and two finishing coatssilk vinyl emulsion paint as "Crown Paints" or other equalapproved on plastered masonry or concrete surfaces: to

G Walls: internally 216 Sm

External Wall Finishes


H 12mm Thick render to walls externally 125 Sm





Prepare surfaces and apply textured wall finish as "RUFF N'TUFF" from Crown-Berger (K) Ltd on plastered masonry orconcrete surfaces: to

A Rendered walls; externally 125 Sm

B Supply and fix approved precisely cut mazeras slates cladding;approved pattern to walls including backing (Provisional)

30 Sm

Ceiling Finishes

Mahogany; wrot; well seasoned; cellcured; selected and keptclean

C 75x75mm Moulded cornice 98 Lm

D 25mm Thick first grade cypress t&g to eaves; nailed on andincluding 50 x 50mm brandering at 600mm centres both ways

82 Sm

Prepare surfaces and apply one coat (undercoat) and twocoats first grade clear polyurethane varnish as "Crown Paints"or other equal approved; on wood surfaces; to

E Cornices; surfaces not exceeding 100mm girth 98 Lm



E Cornices; surfaces not exceeding 100mm girth 98 Lm

F Ceilings, general surfaces 82 Sm


COLLECTION

From page 3/11

From Above

TOTAL FOR FINISHESCarried to Summary of Bill No. 3




ELEMENT NO. 8

JOINERY FIXTURES

The following in 2No. Kitchen worktop and low level cupboardsoverall size 2500mm girth x 600mm wide x 850mm high

A 100mm Thick concrete block (dwarf) wall 2 Sm

B 100mm Thick concrete 1:3:6 in plinth. 3 Sm

C 75mm Thick reinforced concrete 1:2:4 in worktop includingforming opening for double sink. 3 Sm

D BRC mesh type A65 reinforcement in top 3 Sm

E Formwork to soffites of worktop. 3 Sm

F Ditto edge of slab 75 - 150mm high. 5 Lm

G 12mm cement screed floor on plinth including sides 3 Sm

H 12mm Thick plaster to walls 4 Sm

I Prepare and apply three coats oil paint general surface 4 Sm



I Prepare and apply three coats oil paint general surface 4 Sm

J 20mm Thick granite slab on worktop and fascia includingbacking 3 Sm

Wrot cypress

K 50 x 25mm Rebated frame 6 Lm

L 50 x 25mm Bearers 18 Lm

M 50 x 20mm Lipping 6 Lm

25mm Thick blockboard; exposed edges hardwood lipped

N In 125mm wide fascia, faced one side with mahogany veneer1 Lm

O In shelving 3 Sm

P In partitions 1 Sm

Q 25mm Thick door size 325 x 550mm high with lipped edgesand faced on one side with mahogany veneer. 12 No





A 25mm Thick blockboard drawer size 325 x 475 x 125mm deepcomprising of 25mm thick mahogany veneer faced blockboardfront, blockboard sides and 6mm thick plywood bottom allblocked together including 19mm cypress runners on bothsides. 10 No

B 12mm Wide brass piano hinges 7 Lm

C Brass drawer knobs 10 No

D 75mm Brass cupboard door handle 12 No

E 50mm aluminium tower bolt 6 Prs

F Approved Ball catch 6 No

G Brass cupboard door locks 6 No

H Prepare and apply three coats of oil paint to general surfacesof wood 8 Sm

I Ditto surfaces 100 - 200mm girth. 5 Lm

J Prepare and apply three coats wood varnish on generalsurfaces of wood 5 Sm



The following in high level cupboards

K 50 x 25mm bearers 22 Lm

25mm Thick blockboard; exposed edges hardwood lipped

L Bottom, top and shelves 4 Sm

M Sides and divisions 2 Sm

N Door size 300 x 600mm high one side faced with mahoganyveneer; edges hardwood lipped and 15mm planted quadrantmoulding 12 No

O 15mm Wrot mahogany quadrant beading 7 Lm

P Brass piano hinges 7 Lm

Q Brass pull handles; 50mm long 12 No

R Ball catch 12 No

S Prepare and apply three coats of gloss oil paint to generalwood surfaces 11 Sm

T Ditto wood varnish ditto 2 Sm





Wardrobes

The following in 2No. Wardrobes average size 2000 x 600 x2750mm high

A 100mm Thick concrete 1:3:6 plinth 3 Sm

B 12mm Thick cement and sand screed finished with steel trowel3 Sm

In Wrot cypress

C 75 x 50mm Rebated frames 10 Lm

D 75 x 25m Plinth lipping 4 Lm

E 50 x 50mm Rebated frame 14 Lm

F 50 x 25mm Bearers 14 Lm

G 25mm quadrant beading 10 Lm

H 38 x 20mm Architrave 6 Lm

25mm Thick blockboard with all exposed edges hardwoodlipped in



25mm Thick blockboard with all exposed edges hardwoodlipped in

I Bottom 3 Sm

J Sides and divisions 6 Sm

K Shelves 4 Sm

L Door size 650 x 1980mm high one side faced with mahoganyveneer; with 1No. 30mm diameter plastic vent and 15mmquadrant moulding 6 No

M Ditto door size 650 x 450mm high ditto 6 No

N 25mm Thick blockboard drawer size 650 x 550 x 200mm deepcomprising 650 x 25mm front and back, 550 x 25mm sides and6mm thick plywood bottom all blocked together including pullgroves to front panel 6 No

Ironmongery

O Brass piano hinges 8 Lm

P Brass cupboard door locks 4 No

Q Brass door knobs 12 No

R 75 mm Aluminium tower bolt 4 No





A Approved ball catch 6 No

B 19mm Diameter brass plated hanging rail 2000mm longcomplete with fixing brackets 2 No

C Prepare and apply three coats gloss oil paint on generalsurfaces 33 Sm

D Ditto but wood varnish ditto. 10 Sm

E Ditto but surfaces 200 - 300mm girth 18 Lm

End of 2No Wardrobes


COLLECTION

From Page 3/13

From Page 3/14



From Page 3/15

From Above

TOTAL FOR JOINERY FITTINGSCarried to Summary of Bill No. 3




BILL NO. 3

DOMESTIC SERVANT QUARTERS

SUMMARY

Frompage

1 SUBSTRUCTURES 3/3


3 WALLING 3/5


5 WINDOWS 3/8

6 DOORS 3/10



6 DOORS 3/10

7 FINISHES 3/12

8 JOINERY FITTINGS 3/16

SUB-TOTAL FOR ONE (1) NO. DSQ

TOTAL FOR 2 NO. SERVANT QUARTERSCarried to Main Summary

x 2



BILL NO. FOUR (4)

CHANGING ROOMS


Quantity Surveyors



ELEMENT NO. 1

SUBSTRUCTURES

All Provisional

The quantities and nature of work indicated are provisional.

The actual work done shall be ascertained, valued and

adjustments made accordingly. Work measured upto and

including ground floor slab.

Excavation and earthworks

A

Excavate oversite average 150mm deep to remove vegetable

soil cart and deposit in spoil heaps on site as directed 76 Sm

B Excavate to reduce levels not exceeding 1.50 metres deep

from stripped levels 46 Cm

C Ditto for wall foundation ditto. 60 Cm

D Extra over excavation for excavating at any point in rock (no

blasting allowed) 8 Cm


E Allow for maintaining and supporting sides of excavations by

provision of planking and strutting and for keeping the same

free from fallen materials. Item Sum


F Allow for keeping excavations free of water and mud by

pumping, baling or other approved means Item Sum

Fillings

Selected excavated materials compacted in layers not

exceeding 300mm deep: all to the approval of the Engineer

G Around foundations 33 Cm

Selected imported hardcore filling compacted in layers not

exceeding 150mm deep: all to the approval of the Engineer

H 300mm Thick well rammed and consolidated under floors to

the approval of the Engineer 42 Sm

I 50mm Thick quarry dust blinding 42 Sm


Bill No. 4

Changing Rooms 4/1

Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors



A Load and cart away surplus excavated material from the site

as directed by the Architect 73 Cm


B Chemical anti-termite treatment executed complete by an

approved specialist under a ten(10) year guarantee to

surfaces of excavations 80 Sm

Concrete Work

C 50mm Thick blinding concrete; plain mix 1:4:8 under wall

foundation, column base and base slab 36 Sm

Reinforced concrete

Insitu concrete grade 20/20 including vibrating around

reinforcement in

D Wall foundation 8 Cm

E 150mm Thick floor slab 67 Sm

F Extra over slab for thicknessing size 400mm wide x 100mm

thick including forming sinking in hardcore 6 Lm

Reinforcement

High tensile steel reinforcemnt to B.S 4449 and 4466

G 8mm Diameter bars 78 Kg

H 10mm Ditto 288 Kg

I Mesh reinforcement ref A142 or equal and approved

reinforcement in concrete slab including all necessary tying

and support (No allowance for laps) 67 Sm

Sawn Formwork to: -

J Vertical sides of wall foundation 19 Sm

K Edges of slab 75 - 150mm wide 32 Lm

Damp proof membrane

L 1000 gauge polythene or other equal and approved damp

proof membrane laid under surface bed; 300mm side and end

laps 67 Sm


Bill No. 4

Changing Rooms 4/2

Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors


Load bearing approved natural stone walling, chisel dressed;

jointed in cement and sand (1:3) mortar


Plinths

B 12mm Thick cement/sand (1:4) render to plinths 11 Sm

C Approved bituminous paint to rendered surfaces 11 Sm


COLLECTION

From Page 4/1

From Page 4/2

From Above


Bill No. 4

Changing Rooms 4/3

Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors


ELEMENT NO. 2


Vibrated Reinforced Concrete

Insitu concrete grade 20/20 including vibrating around

reinforcement.

A Ring beams 4 Cm

Reinforcement


B 8mm Diameter bar 78 Kg

C 12mm Diameter bar 198 Kg

Formwork

Sawn Formwork to: -

D Sides and soffites of beams 37 Sm

TOTAL OF REINFORCED CONCRETE SUPERSTRUCTURE Carried to Summary of Bill No. 4

Bill No. 4

Changing Rooms 4/4

Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors


ELEMENT NO. 3

WALLING

External Walls


A 100mm Wide 6 Lm

B 200mm wide 46 Lm

Selected cut and natural colour quarry stone walling bedded

and jointed in cement and sand (1:4) mortar; both sides

finished to receive plaster

C 200mm Thick walling 101 Sm

Internal Walls

Machine cut natural stone walling bedded and jointed in

cement/sand (1:4) mortar; raking where necessary


E 200mm Thick walling 34 Sm

TOTAL OF WALLING Carried to Summary of Bill No. 4

Bill No. 4

Changing Rooms 4/5

Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors


ELEMENT NO. 4


Sawn cypress;second grade; clean; well seasoned and

treated with approved wood preservative; pressure-

impregnated with celcure 'A' with and including all jointing and

connections (packing piece, bolts etc) as necessary; in roof

approximately 8,500mm high.

The following in trusses and/or independent members


B Ditto ceiling joists 32 Lm

C Ditto purlins 31 Lm

D Ditto ridges 11 Lm

E 100x50mm Struts 41 Lm

F 100 x 50mm Wall plate; fixed to concrete or masonry with and

including approved bolts at 1000mm centres 44 Lm

ROOF COVERING

Decra roofing tiles supplied by Space and Style (k) ltd or other

equal and approved; laid and fixed in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions and to Architect's approval

G Roof covering including all necessary fixtures 115 Sm

H Ridge or hip covering 27 Lm

Eaves covering (provisional)

I

25mm Thick first grade cypress t&g to eaves; nailed on and

including 50 x 50mm brandering at 600mm centres both ways 33 Sm

J uPVC fascia or berge board as from Space and Style Ltd fixed

in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions 48 Lm

Prepare surfaces and apply undercoat and two finishing coats

of approved wood varnish; to

K General surfaces 33 Sm


Bill No. 4

Changing Rooms 4/6

Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors


Rainwater Goods

Prepainted galvanized metal; 18 gauge

A 150 x 150mm Box gutter; fixed to fascia with and including

steel flat brackets at 1500 mm (maximum) centres; holes for

down pipes as necessary; closed ends. 46 Lm

B 100x100mm Rain water downpipe; holderbats at 1500mm

(maximum) centres 46 Lm

C Extra over ditto for 800 mm swan neck offset 6 No

D Ditto for shoe 6 No


COLLECTION

From Page 4/6

From Above

TOTAL OF ROOF CONSTRUCTION AND COVERING Carried to Summary of Bill No. 4

Bill No. 4

Changing Rooms 4/7

Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors


ELEMENT NO. 5

WINDOWS

Approved red clay tile cill; bedded and jointed in cement/sand

(1:3) mortar; pointed in matching coloured cement.


Supply, assemble and fix the following purpose-made "Z"

section steel casemnt windows to comply to B.S. 990,

obtained from an approved manufacturer, primed with red

oxide primer before delivery to site complete with hinges,

handles, catches and building in lugs

B Window size 900 x 1200mm high overall 6 No

C Window size 600 x 900mm high overall 2 No


Glazing

5mm Thick obscured sheet glass and glazing to steel

casement window with and including linseed putty;

E In panes; various sizes 12 Sm

Prepare surfaces; apply undercoat and two finishing coats

first grade eggshell paint on metal surfaces to

F General surfaces; window and burglarproofing grilles internally

(measured flat overall) 12 Sm

G General surfaces; windows externally ditto 12 Sm


Bill No. 4

Changing Rooms 4/8

Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors


ELEMENT NO. 6

DOORS

Mild steel doors

A Louvred steel casement door overall size 1000x2100mm high

comprising 100x50x3mm thick frames, stiles, middle and top

rails; 200x50x3mm thick rhs bottom rail; 18 gauge louvres;

mosquito gauze on 25x4mm thick flats; all welding; priming

and necessary ironmongery and finishing to Architect's detail

1 No

Timber Panel doors

45mm Thick solid panel door; comprising 120 x 45mm rebated

stiles and top rails, 95x45mm middle rails and transomes, 200

x 45mm bottom rail and infilled with moulded solid hardwood

panels all framed together and finished to Architect's detail in:

B Door size 900x2400mm high 2 No

Flush doors

45mm Thick mahogany veneer faced flush door; hardwood

lipped edges; with planted moulding to architects details

C 800x2100mm high; semi-solid cored flush door 4 No

Wrot mahogany; prime grade; three labours




Prepare surfaces and apply one coat (undercoat) and two

coats first grade clear polyurethane varnish as "Crown paints"

or other equal approved; on wood surfaces to

G Door; general surfaces 23 Sm

H Surfaces over 200mm but not exceeding 300mm girth; frame;

architrave and quadrant 33 Lm


Bill No. 4

Changing Rooms 4/9

Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors


Ironmongery

Supply and fix English "Union" or other equal approved

ironmongery; matching screws; locks to include a set of 3

keys, catalogue numbers refer to the "Union catalogue issued

by "Josiah parkes & Sons limited" of the United Kingdom;

available from their authorized local dealers

A Two lever mortice lock; complete with a set of brass lever

handle furniture fixed to timber door 4 No

B Indicator bolts 2 No

C 38mm diameter rubber door stops No. 8400 to concrete or

blockwork fixing with screws; plugging 6 No

D 100 mm Long brass butt hinges 9 Prs


COLLECTION

From Page 4/9

From Above

TOTAL OF DOORSCarried to Summary of Bill No. 4

Bill No. 4

Changing Rooms 4/10

Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors


ELEMENT NO. 7

FINISHES

Floor Finishings



Non-slip Ceramic tile

Supply and fix coloured ceramic tiles as supplied by Tile &

Carpet Centre including matching grout to the approval of the

Architect; to

B Floors; on level screed (m/s) 56 Sm

Wall finishes


C 12mm Thick render to receive ceramic tiles 139 Sm

300 x 250 x 6mm Coloured glazed ceramic tiles as 'Saj

Ceramics' to regular pattern; bedding and jointing in cement

mortar (1:4) grouting joints with matching cement

D To wall; grouting edges 139 Sm

Plaster 9mm first coat of cement/lime putty/sand (1:2:9):3mm

second coat of cement/lime putty/sand (1:1:6): steel troweled;

on masonry or concrete: to

E Walls; internally 78 Sm

Prepare surfaces and apply undercoat and two finishing coats

silk vinyl emulsion paint as "Crown Paints" or other equal

approved on plastered masonry or concrete surfaces: to

F Walls: internally 78 Sm

External Wall Finishes


G 12mm Thick render to walls externally 111 Sm


Bill No. 4

Changing Rooms 4/11

Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors


Prepare surfaces and apply textured wall finish as "RUFF N'

TUFF" from Crown-Berger (K) Ltd on plastered masonry or

concrete surfaces: to

A Rendered walls; externally 1,110 Sm

B Extra over external stone wall for bush hammered coynes to

edges in alternating lengths of 200 and 100mm on both sides

of the edge 30 Lm

Ceiling Finishes

C Approved moisture resistant Gypsum board ceiling fixed to

and including brandering 42 Sm

D Ditto but moulded cornice 38 Lm

Prepare and apply undercoat and two finishing coats premium

grade emulsion paint as "Crown Paints" or other equal

approved on gypsum surfaces to

E Gypsum ceilings, general surfaces 42 Sm

Pergola - Provisional

Treated and well seasoned hardwood timber including all

jointing and anchoring, all in accordance with Architect's

drawings and details

F 150x150mm Post one end fixed to the ground with purpose

made mild steel shoe bolted to and including concrete base;

overall 3000mm high above floor level 4 No

G 100x200mm Members finished with polyurethane stain to the

satisfaction of the Architect 38 Lm


COLLECTION

From page 4/11

From Above

TOTAL FOR FINISHES

Carried to Summary of Bill No. 4

Bill No. 4

Changing Rooms 4/12

Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors


ELEMENT NO. 8

JOINERY FIXTURES

Lockers

A Provide the Provisional Sum of Kshs. TWO Hundred

Thousand (200,000/=) only for the fabrication, supply and

fixing of Shelves and Lockers to be expended upon the

instructions of the Architect Item Sum 200,000.00

Benches

B Provide for seats/benches overall 2200x450mm wide x

500mm high in wrot cypress slats 75x50mm with two labours

on L-shaped 40x4mm thick angle brackets 300x435mm with a

bracing; bolted to wall all as per drawing in page A.15 in the

Appendix 2 No

TOTAL FOR JOINERY FITTINGS

Carried to Summary of Bill No. 3

Bill No. 4

Changing Rooms 4/13

Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors


BILL NO. 4

CHANGING ROOMS

SUMMARY

From

page

1 SUBSTRUCTURES 4/3


3 WALLING 4/5


5 WINDOWS 4/8

6 DOORS 4/10

7 FINISHES 4/12


TOTAL FOR CHANGING ROOMS

Carried to Main Summary

Bill No. 4

Changing Rooms 4/14

Constingconsult Ltd

Quantity Surveyors

BILL NO. FIVE (5)

ABLUTION BLOCK


Quantity Surveyors



ELEMENT NO. 1

SUBSTRUCTURES

All ProvisionalThe quantities and nature of work indicated are provisional.The actual work done shall be ascertained, valued andadjustments made accordingly. Work measured upto andincluding ground floor slab.

Excavation and earthworks

A Excavate to remove black cotton soil not exceeding 1.50metres deep from stripped levels 69 Cm

B Ditto exceeding 1.50m but not exceeding 3.0 metres deepfrom stripped levels 11 Cm

C Excavate for wall foundation commencing at reduced leveland not exceeding 1.50metres deep. 10 Cm

Risk of collapse of excavations



Bill No. 5Ablution Block


D Allow for maintaining and supporting sides of excavations byprovision of planking and strutting and for keeping the samefree from fallen materials. Item Sum


E Allow for keeping excavations free of water (except spring orrunning water) and mud by pumping, baling or other approvedmeans Item Sum

Fillings

Selected imported hardcore filling watered and compacted inlayers not exceeding 150mm deep

F Well rammed and consolidated under floor slab in layers notexceeding 200mm thick 66 Cm

G 50mm Thick quarry dust blinding to surfaces of hardcore 35 Sm


H Load and cart away surplus excavated material from the siteas directed by the Architect 92 Cm





Soil poisoning


A Chemical anti-termite treatment executed complete by anapproved specialist under a ten(10) year guarantee tosurfaces of excavations 60 Sm

Concrete Work

Plain concrete ; mix 1:4:8 in

B 50mm Thick blinding concrete under wall foundation 26 Sm

Reinforced concrete


C Wall foundation 5 Cm

D 150mm Thick floor slab 45 Sm

E Extra over slab for thicknessing size 400mm wide x 100mmthick including forming sinking in hardcore 12 Lm



E Extra over slab for thicknessing size 400mm wide x 100mmthick including forming sinking in hardcore 12 Lm

Reinforcement

High tensile steel reinforcement t

F 8mm Diameter bars 61 Kg

G 10mm Diameter bars 119 Kg

H Mesh reinforcement ref A 142 or equal and approvedreinforcement in concrete slab including all necessary tyingand support (No allowance for laps) 45 Sm

Sawn Formwork to: -

I Vertical sides of wall foundation 17 Sm

J Edges of slab 75 - 150m wide 27 Lm

Damp proof membrane

K500 gauge polythene or other equal and approved damp proofmembrane laid under surface bed; 300mm side and end laps 45 Sm





Foundation walling



Plinths

B 12mm Thick cement/sand (1:4) render to plinths 10 Sm

C Approved bituminous paint to rendered surfaces 10 Sm


COLLECTION

From Page 5/1

From Page 5/2



From Above

TOTAL OF SUBSTRUCTURESCarried to Summary of Bill No 5




ELEMENT NO. 2

WALLING

Ring Beams


A Ring beams 2 Cm

Sawn Formwork to: -

B Sides and soffites of beams 28 Sm

Reinforcement

C 8mm Diameter high tensile bar 81 Kg

D 12mm Diameter ditto 181 Kg


E 150mm wide 11 Lm



F 200mm wide 29 Lm

External Walls

Selected cut natural colour quarry stone walling bedded andjointed in cement and sand (1:4) mortar and finished fair bothsides

G 200mm Thick walling 56 Sm

H Extra over external stone wall for bush hammered coynes toedges in alternating lengths of 200 and 100mm on both sidesof the edge 18 Lm

Internal Walls

Machine cut natural stone walling bedded and jointed incement/sand (1:4) mortar

I 150mm Thick walling 24 Sm

J 200mm Thick walling 11 Sm

TOTAL OF WALLINGCarried to Summary of Bill No 5




ELEMENT NO. 3


Sawn cypress;second grade; clean; well seasoned andtreated with approved wood preservative; pressure-impregnated with celcure 'A' with and including all jointing andconnections (packing piece, bolts etc) as necessary; in roofapproximately 3,000mm high

The following in trusses or independent members


B 100 x 50 mm Ceiling joists 24 Lm

C 100 x 50mm Struts 41 Lm

D 100 x 50mm Purlins 21 Lm

E 100 x 50mm Wall plate; fixed to concrete or masonry with andincluding approved bolts at 1000mm centres 27 Lm

ROOF COVERING



ROOF COVERING

Decra roofing tiles supplied by Space and Style (k) ltd orother equal and approved; laid and fixed in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions and to Architect's approval

F Roof covering including all necessary fixtures 66 Sm

Ridge/Hip cap 18 Lm

G Flashings; 26 gauge; 400mm wide; bending and fixing undertiles 3 Lm

Rainwater Goods

Galvanised metal sheet; gauge 24; pre-painted

H 150 x 150mm Box gutter; fixed to fascia with and includingsteel flat brackets at 1500 mm (maximum) centres; holes fordown pipes as necessary; closed ends.

32 Lm

I 100 x 100mm Diameter rain water downpipe; holderbats at1500mm (maximum) centres 18 Lm

J Extra over ditto for 800 mm swan neck offset 6 No





A Ditto for shoe 6 No

Eaves covering

B 25mm Thick first grade cypress t&g to eaves; nailed on andincluding 50 x 50mm brandering at 600mm centres both waysand 75mm wrot cypress cornice along walls 22 Sm

C 225 x 25mm Fascia and berge board 35 Lm

Prepare surfaces and apply undercoat and two finishing coatsof approved wood varnish; to

D General surfaces 22 Sm

Prepare surfaces and apply undercoat and two finishing coatsfirst grade gloss enamel paint as "Crown Paint" or other equalapproved; on wooden surfaces; to

EFascia; surfaces over 200 but not exceeding 300mm girth 31 Lm

Roof vents

F Roof vent, triangular in shape overall 2000x500mm highcomprising 75x25mm thick wrot cypress louvres withmosquito gauze; 50x50mm cypress framing; varnished 2 No



F Roof vent, triangular in shape overall 2000x500mm highcomprising 75x25mm thick wrot cypress louvres withmosquito gauze; 50x50mm cypress framing; varnished 2 No


COLLECTION

From Page 5/5

From Above

TOTAL OF ROOF CONSTRUCTION AND COVERINGCarried to Summary of Bill No 5




ELEMENT NO. 4

WINDOWS

Approved red clay tile cill; bedded and jointed in cement/sand

(1:3) mortar; pointed in matching coloured cement.


Steel casement window; purpose made standard metalcasement sections complete with integral burglar proofing12mm square bars; Zed sections to architects detail andapproval; including permanent ventilators comprising 'T' bargauze and metal hood; openable casements; couplingmullions; approved ironmongery; as per schedule. Pattern asshown in the Appendix

B Window size 900 x 900mm high overall 4 No

C Window size 600 x 600mm high overall 8 No

5mm Thick obscured sheet glass and glazing to steelcasement window with and including linseed putty; in panes



5mm Thick obscured sheet glass and glazing to steelcasement window with and including linseed putty; in panes

D Panes various sizes 3 Sm

5mm Thick one way glass and glazing to steel casememt withand including linseed putty; in panes

E 0.5 to 1.0 square metres 2 Sm

Prepare metal surfaces; apply undercoat and two finishingcoats first grade eggshell paint; as "Crown paints" or otherequal approved metallic paint on metal surfaces to

F General surfaces; window and burglarproofing grilles internally(measured flat overall) 5 Sm

GGeneral surfaces; windows externally (measured flat overall) 5 Sm

TOTAL OF WINDOWSCarried to Summary of Bill No 5




ELEMENT NO. 5

DOORS

Flush doors

45mm Thick flush door both sides faced both sides withmahogany veneer; all edges hardwood lipped

A 800 x 2100mm Door; semi-solid cored 2 No

B 800 x 2000mm Door; semi-solid cored with aluminiumflashing internally 8 No

C 900 x 2100mm Door; solid cored; with clear glass panel250x850mm 2 No

Wrot mahogany in;







G 20mm Quadrant 21 Lm

Prepare surfaces; apply undercoat and two finishing coatswood varnish; as "Crown paints" or other equal approvedpaint to

H Door; general surfaces 43 Sm

I Surfaces over 200mm but not exceeding 300mm girth; frame,architrave and quadrant 65 Lm

Ironmongery

Supply and fix English "Union" or other equal approvedironmongery; matching screws; locks to include a set of 3keys

J Three lever mortice lock; complete with a set of brass leverhandle furniture fixed to timber door 4 No

K Approved indicator bolts 8 No

L 38mm diameter rubber door stops No. 8400 to concrete orblockwork fixing with screws; plugging 12 No

M 100mm Long steel butt hinges 18 PrsTOTAL OF DOORS

Carried to Summary of Bill No 5




ELEMENT NO. 6

FINISHES

Floor Finishings



300 x 300 x 8mm Approved coloured ceramic floor tiles as'Saj Ceramics' or other equal approved; to regular pattern;grouting joints in matching cement; to

B Floors; on level screed (m/s) 36 Sm

C Skirting 100mm high 8 Lm

Wall finishes


D 12mm Thick render to receive ceramic tiles 88 Sm

200 x 250 x 6mm Coloured glazed tiles as 'Saj Ceramics' toregular pattern; bedding and jointing in cement mortar (1:4)grouting joints with matching cement



200 x 250 x 6mm Coloured glazed tiles as 'Saj Ceramics' toregular pattern; bedding and jointing in cement mortar (1:4)grouting joints with matching cement

E To wall; grouting edges 88 Sm

Plaster 9mm first coat of cement/lime putty/sand (1:2:9):3mmsecond coat of cement/lime putty/sand (1:1:6): steel toweled;on masonry or concrete: to

F Walls; internally 38 Sm

Prepare surfaces and apply undercoat and two finishing coatsplastic emulsion paint as "Crown Paints" or other equalapproved on plastered masonry or concrete surfaces: to

G Walls: internally 38 Sm

Cement and sand (1:4) render: on concrete or masonry:wood float finished; to

H Wall and concrete; externally 66 Sm





Prepare surfaces and apply undercoat and two finishing coatsfirst grade emulsion paint as "Crown Paints" or other equalapproved on plaster masonry or concrete surfaces to

A Wall and concrete; externally 66 Sm

Ceiling Finishes

First grade cypress; wrot; well seasoned; cellcured; selectedand kept clean

B 75mm Moulded cornice top piece; fixed to ceiling 73 Lm

C Gypsum board ceiling fixed on and including 50 x 50brandering at 600mm centers both ways 34 Sm

Prepare surfaces and apply one coat (undercoat) and twocoats oil paint on wood surfaces; to

D Cornices; surfaces not exceeding 100mm girth 73 Lm

Prepare and apply three coats of plastic emulsion paint by"Crown Paints" or other equal and approved; on gypsumsurfaces



Prepare and apply three coats of plastic emulsion paint by"Crown Paints" or other equal and approved; on gypsumsurfaces

E Ceilings, general surfaces 34 Sm


COLLECTION

From page 5/9

From above

TOTAL FOR FINISHESCarried to Summary of Bill No 5




ELEMENT NO. 7

JOINERY FIXTURES

Vanity tops

A Wash Hand Basin Vanity tops overall size 2200x600mm wide;50mm thick concrete worktop: top, fascia(250mm wide) andsplash skirting finished with granite slab; all with bevelededges 2 No



TOTAL FOR JOINERY FITTINGSCarried to Summary of Bill No 5




SUMMARY

BILL NO. 5

ABLUTION BLOCK

Frompage

1 SUBSTRUCTURES 5/3

2 WALLING 5/4


4 WINDOWS 5/7

5 DOORS 5/8



6 FINISHES 5/10.


TOTAL FOR ABLUTION BLOCKCarried to Main Summary



BILL NO. SIX (6)

EXTERNAL WORKS


Quantity Surveyors



EXTERNAL WORKS

(All Provisional)

SITE PREPARATION

A Clear the site of bushes, shrubs, hedges, undergrowth etc andsmall trees not exceeding 600mm girth including grubbing up rootsand remove from site Item Sum

B Cut down and remove tree average 900 mm girth grub up rootsand cart away 6 No

C Ditto but average 1500mm girth ditto 5 No

D Ditto but average 1800mm girth ditto 3 No

E Dig out and grab up roots of tree stamps ditto 4 No


Quantity SurveyorsBill No. 6External Works

TOTAL OF SITE PREPARATIONCarried to Summary of External Works




DRIVEWAY AND PARKING

A Excavate to reduce levels not exceeding 1.50 metres deep fromexisting ground levels remove and cart away 1,798 Cm

B Grade and compact surfaces of excavations 3,996 Sm

C 300mm Thick hardcore sub-base laid, well compacted and rolled tothe satisfaction of the Civil Engineer 3,996 Sm

D150mm Thick handpacked stone base laid and compacted to100% compaction at optimum moisture content and rolled to falls 3,996 Sm

E Supply and lay medium duty precast concrete interlocking pavingblocks as "Bamburiblox" with rounded edges and butt joints laid toan approved pattern on and including 50mm thick quarry dust bedincluding all necessary raking cutting to edges and making goodkerbs to the satisfaction of the Engineer 3,996 Sm

Kerbs

F 250 x 225mm Precast concrete grade '20' road kerb, batered at toplaid on and including 450 x 150mm high concrete grade '15'haunch including excavations, grading bottoms and disposal ofexcavated material 1,155 Lm



F 250 x 225mm Precast concrete grade '20' road kerb, batered at toplaid on and including 450 x 150mm high concrete grade '15'haunch including excavations, grading bottoms and disposal ofexcavated material 1,155 Lm

G Ditto but curved to various radii 471 Lm

H 125 x 100mm Precast concrete grade 20 road channel bedded inconcrete 72 Lm

Paved Walkways

I Excavate to reduce levels not exceeding 1.5metres deep and cartaway from site 203 Cm

J Approved hardcore filling laid and compacted in layers notexceeding 200mm thick to the approval of the Engineer 203 Cm

Interlocking light duty precast concrete paving blocks as beforedescribed including 25mm thick sand bed

K 50mm Thick concrete paving blocks, laid to pattern 675 Sm

L 125 x 100mm precast concrete grade 20 flush road channelbedded in 325x100mm class 15 concrete 1,125 Lm

M 600x600mm x 25mm Thick precast concrete paving slab laid onand including all necessary excavations, levelling and 50mmcompacted quarry dust and pointing 169 Sm

TOTAL OF PARKING AND PAVED AREASCarried to Summary of External Works




BOUNDARY WALL AND GATES (Provisional)

A Excavate for wall footing or column bases not exceeding 1.50metres deep 388 Cm

B Allow for maintaning and supporting sides of excavations Item Sum

C Select excavated material part fill around foundations compact inlayers and part cart away 388 Cm

D Reinforced concrete grade 1:2:4 including vibrating around bars inwall footing or column base 87 Cm

E 200mm thick masonry wall in cement mortar 1:4 in foundation 492 Sm

F 200mm Wide bituminous based damp proof course under walls 645 Lm

G 200mm thick quarry stone walling bedded and joined in cementand sand mortar both sides fair faced, keyed and pointed 1,313 Sm

H 50mm Thick special cut mazeras cladding to surfaces of R.Ccolumn; backing and recessed key pointing 342 Sm

I Precast concrete copping size 425x75mm average thick tappered,bedded and jointed in cement mortar 645 Lm



J Ditto 690x545mmx150 thick average tappered all sides ditto 228 No

K Reinforced concrete 1:2:4 including vibrating in columns 51 Cm

The following in mild steel to BS5950; all welding to BS5135,Grade 4.6 bolts and nuts to BS BS4360; making small holes;priming and connections to the approval of the Engineer; in

L Metal grille panel average 600mm high comprising 20 x 4mm thickx 600mm high RHS vertical bars spaced at 230mm centres, 50 x4mm x 500mm high RHS vertical bars spaced at 2400mm centresand fixed to walls, all welded to and including 20 x 6mm thick m.sflat bottom and top rails centres and fixed between pillars includingwelding and priming, all as per Architect's drawings (See AppendixA14) 637 Lm

Sawn formwork to:

M Vertical sides of column base 76 Sm

N Sides of columns 251 Sm

High tensile steel reinforcement (Provisional)

O 8mm diameter bars 1,394 Kg

P 10mm diameter bars 3,190 Kg





Gates

A 40mm overall thick metal gate size 6000 x 2200 high in two equalleaves; comprising 65 x 65 x 3mm RHS framing and twistedornamental steel rods; 100 x 6mm thick plate bottom; 100 x 45mmmild steel horizontal members both ways; all mouldings anddecorations; complete with hinges and strap bolts, tower bolts,gate stops; all welded primed and painted with oil paint; reinforcedconcrete pillars (m/s), finished to Architect's detail (See AppendixA14) 1 No

B Ditto but 5000 x 2100mm high ditto 2 No

C Ditto but pedestrian gate size 1200 x 2100mm high in single leaveditto 2 No


COLLECTION

From Page 6/3



From Above

TOTAL OF BOUNDARY WALL AND GATESCarried to Summary of External Works




GATE HOUSES

A Construction complete of gate house overall size 5.2 x 3.0 x 2.6metres high complete with a washroom 1400x2300mm wide;constructed of stone masonry walls, painted internally and key-pointed externally, timber roof structure covered with decra roofingtiles; mild steel casement windows, hardwood veneered semi-solidcore flush doors; in-built benches; all complete in accordance withthe Architect's drawings and details (services installations takenseperately) 1 No

B Ditto size 3.7 x 3.05 x 2.6 metres high complete with a washroom1200x2200mm wide; constructed of stone masonry walls, paintedinternally and key-pointed externally,concrete flat roof structure;mild steel casement windows, hardwood veneered semi-solid coreflush doors; all complete in accordance with the Architect'sdrawings and details (services installations taken seperately) 1 No

Dustbin Cubicles

C Construct complete dustbin cubicles overall size 2000x800mmwide x 1500mm high in smooth dressed masonry walling andcovered in Decra roofing tiles complete; all in accordance with theArchitect's detail 2 No

.



.

TOTAL FOR GATE HOUSESCarried to Summary of External Works




FOUL DRAINAGE

A Excavate trench for 100 or 150mm diameter drain pipes notexceeding 1.50 metres deep but average depth 600mm, partreturn and remainder cart away 450 Lm

Heavy gauge UPVC golden colour drain pipes complete withfittings laying, jointing and laying in trench

B 100mm Diameter pipe 150 Lm

C 150mm Ditto 300 Lm

D 225mm Diameter precast concrete drain pipe with spigot joints andincluding concrete surround and all earthworks 100 Lm

E 450 x 150mm class 20 concrete bed and haunching surround to100mm pipe under traffic 51 Lm

Manholes

F Construct complete manhole including all masonry walling,reinforcement, formwork, channels, plaster, outlets, connections,earthworks, concrete work, and 600x450mm medium duty castiron cover manhole size 600x450mm internally x 600mm averagedeep to invert 35 No



F Construct complete manhole including all masonry walling,reinforcement, formwork, channels, plaster, outlets, connections,earthworks, concrete work, and 600x450mm medium duty castiron cover manhole size 600x450mm internally x 600mm averagedeep to invert 35 No

G Ditto manhole size 900x450mm internally x1000mm deep to invertall Ditto 20 No

H Ditto manhole size 900x600mmx1500mm deep to invert Ditto 5 No

Gulley Trap

I 100mm Diameter coated cast iron trapped gulley with 100mmdiameter outlet, 150mm diameter cast iron grating set bedded inconcrete 1:3:6 including forming 203 x 203 x 150mm high (internal) gulley surround with 75mm thick sides and rebated top edge forand including cover 20 No

Conservancy Tank

J Construct complete conservancy tank capacity 5000litres all inaccordance with the Structural and Mechanical Engineer's details

1 No

TOAL OF FOUL WATER DRAINAGECarried to summary of External Works




ANCILLARY STRUCTURES

Gazebo

A Construct complete Gazebo overall size 6000mm diameter; allearthwaorks and foundations, paved steps, cladded concretecolumns, beams and decra roof covering on timber structure;timber boarding to floor, t&g ceiling; All complete as per detaileddrawing attached in the Appendix 1 No

Berbeque

B Construct complete Berbeque overall size 7000mm diameter; allearthworks and foundations, paved steps, stone walls, claddedconcrete columns, beams and decra roof covering on timberstructure; mazeras paving to floor; All complete as per detaileddrawing attached in the Appendix 1 No

C Barbeque worktop curved on plan to profile overall size6000x600mm wide including service counter, Cooker(m/s) andsink(m/s); 50mm thick concrete worktop finished with BLUE KINGMARBLE CLASSIC or similar and approved granite top and fascia;hardwood veneered blockboard sides, shelves and partitions all inaccordance with Architect's drawing 1 No

Generator House



Generator House

D Construction complete of GENERATOR house overall size 4.0 x3.0 x 2.8 metres high complete; constructed of stone masonrywalls, plastered internally and key-pointed externally, 150mm thickRC flat slab water-proofed; louvred precast concrete vent blockwindows, louvred steel casement doors; all complete in acordancewit the Architect's drawings and details (services installations takenseperately) 1 No

TOTAL OF ANCILLARY STRUCTURESCarried to Summary of External Works




STORM WATER DRAINAGE

A 150mm Diameter heavy gauge UPVC pipe in trench including

excavations, 100mm thick concrete (1:3:6) surround and backfilling 151 Lm

B 225mm Diameter precast concrete grade 25 drain pipes intrenches with spigot joints ditto 90 Lm

C 175mm Thick x 800mm wide x 500mm long stormwater shallowInvert Block Drainage channel curved to 650mm radius includingall necessary earthworks, sand bed and 50mm concrete bedding

25 Lm

D Ditto but 600mm diameter IBD channel with one side slab on bothsides 35 Lm

E Road gully internal size 450 x 450 x 300mm average deepcomplete including all earthworks, grating cover, haunching, pipeconnections as per details. 4 No

F Construct complete Road culvert 600mm diameter x5000mm longincluding all earthworks,150mm thick, end and walls rendering toend walls etc as per detail. 2 No

G Ditto but 900mm diameter x 7500mm long all ditto 1 No



G Ditto but 900mm diameter x 7500mm long all ditto 1 No

Open channel

H Open channel size 200mm diameter average x 200mm deep withside embankment at 45 degrees including excavation andcompacting 233 Lm

TOTAL OF STORMWATER DRAINAGECarried to Summary of External Works




SWIMMING POOL

A Excavate for swimming pool pit not exceeding 1.50 metres deepfrom existing ground level and cart away no allowance for workingspace 186 Cm

B Ditto exceeding 1.50 metres but not exceeding 3.0 metres deepfrom existing ground level and cart away 25 Cm

C Trim and level surfaces of excavation 60 Sm

D Ditto but to slope ditto 68 Sm


E Allow for maintaining and supporting sides of excavations byprovision of planking and strutting and for keeping the same freefrom fallen materials. Item Sum


F Allow for keeping excavations free of water (except spring orrunning water) and mud by pumping, baling or other approvedmeans Item Sum





G 50mm Thick blinding concrete under base slab 128 Sm


H 200mm Thick base slab 128 Sm

I Extra over slab for thicknessing average 700mm wide x 200mmthick 56 Lm

J 200mm Thick wall 58 Sm

K Beams or steps 6 Cm

L Sides and base of channel around the pool 7 Cm

M Sump 600x600x300mm deep complete with approved PVC grating2 No





Vandex or other equal and approved waterproofing additiveapplied to manufacturer's instructions on and including cementand sand screed paving on

A 30mm Thick screed laid to floor 115 Sm

B 15mm Thick plaster on walls 58 Sm

C 25x25mm Angle fillet 53 Lm

D "SIKA" or other equal and approved PVC water bar 200mm wide53 Lm

High tensile steel reinforcement as before described (provisional)

E 10mm Diameter bars 3,620 Kg

F 12mm Ditto 2,450 Kg

G Mesh reinforcement ref A 142 or equal and approvedreinforcement in concrete slab including all necessary tying andsupport (No allowance for laps) 128 Sm

Sawn Formwork curved to various radii to: -



H Vertical sides of wall 116 Sm

I Sides and soffites of channel 50 Sm

J Edge of slab 150-225mm wide 176 Lm

K Steps 150 - 225mm wide 15 Lm

Alcalages porcelain or other equal and approved mosaic tiles;glazed blue and bedding and jointing in appropriate cement/sandmortar and grouting with matching cement

L 6mm Thick to pool floor 116 Sm

MExtra over tiling for dressing into sump size 600x600x300mm deep 2 No

N 6mm Thick to pool walls including cutting and fitting aroundopenings 58 Sm

O 150mm thick hardcore filling including excavation and cart awaytop soil, compacting layer of hardcore and blinding 164 Sm

P Mazeras tiles around the pool including 75mm thick concrete bed20mm thick cement/sand screed backing 58 Sm





A 600x600x50mm Thick coloured special concrete paving slabs laidon 50mm sand bed and pointing 106 Sm

B Extra over floor tiles for footbaths 450x450mm x150mm deep 2 No

C In stainless steel; 2200mm long x 400mm wide ladder in 40x40mmframing and 30x25mm lugs/steps at 250mm centres 1 No

D Ditto but 1000mm long ladder ditto 2 No

E 50mm Diameter stainless steel hand railing around the pool fixedwith and including lugs steps built into concrete 27 Lm

Hot deep galvanized steel

F 35x35x3mm Thick angle frame fixed with lugs in concrete. 90 Lm

G 300mm wide grating comprising 35x6mm thick frames and flats at25mm centres in lengths not exceeding 1000mm long includingcurved sections 60 Lm


COLLECTION



From page 6/9

From page 6/10

From Above

TOTAL OF SWIMMING POOLCarried to Summary of External Works




LANDSCAPING

Drying Lines

A Gauge (4mm diameter) mild steel drawn wire three No. strands(lines) 8 metres long each comprising 3No. 50mm diameter 4mmthick pipe 2300mm long over all post with one end 150mm longcast in and including 150x450mm deep concrete base, 1No.50x30mmx3mm thick angle, 600mm long horizontal cross member2No. 50x30mmx3mm anglex200mm long struts complete withwelding and fixing. 6 No

B Provide a Provisional Sum of Two Million Kenya Shillings onlyfor Landscaping to be omitted or expended in whole or in part atthe discretion of the Architect Item Sum 2,000,000.00



TOTAL OF LANDSCAPINGCarried to Summary of External Works




BILL NO. 6

EXTERNAL WORKS

SUMMARY

FromPage

1 SITE PREPARATION 6/1

2 DRIVEWAY, PARKING & PAVED AREAS 6/2

3 BOUNDARY WALLS AND GATES 6/4

4 GATE HOUSES 6/5

5 FOUL DRAINAGE 6/6

6 ANCILLARY STRUCTURES 6/7



6 ANCILLARY STRUCTURES 6/7

7 STORM WATER DRAINAGE 6/8

8 SWIMMING POOL 6/11

9 LANDSCAPING 6/12

TOTAL OF EXTERNAL WORKSCarried to Main Summary



PC AND PROVISIONAL SUMS

BILL NO. SEVEN (7)


Quantity Surveyors


Item Description Qty Unit Amount

BILL NO. 7

PRIME COST AND PROVISIONAL SUMS

Include the following PC Sums for works to be executed bynominated specialist Sub-contractors

A Provide the Prime Cost Sum of Kshs. Twenty Million, SevenHundred Thousand (20,700,000/=) only for Electrical Installations

Item Sum 20,700,000.00

B Allow for Profits %

C Allow for Builders work and all Attendance in connection withelectrical installations for all the works Item Sum

D Provide the Prime Cost Sum of Kshs. Eighteen Million, TwoHundred Thousand (18,200,000/=) only for Plumbing, Drainageand Sanitary Installations Item Sum 18,200,000.00

E Allow for Profits %

F Allow for Builders work and all Attendance in connection withmechanical installations for all the works Item Sum


Bill No. 7P.C Provisional Sums

F Allow for Builders work and all Attendance in connection withmechanical installations for all the works Item Sum

G Provide the Prime Cost Sum of Kshs. Nine Million, (9,000,000/=)only for Sauna, Steambath and Kitchen Equipment,Airconditioning and LPG Installations Item Sum 9,000,000.00

H Allow for Profits %

I Allow for Builders work and all Attendance in connection withmechanical installations for all the works Item Sum

Include the following Provisional Sums for works to be executedby nominated specialist Sub-contractors

J Provide the Provisional Sum of Kshs. Two Million (2,000,000/=)only for Underground Water tank to be omitted or expended inwhole or in part at the discretion of the Architect Item Sum 2,000,000.00

K Provide the Provisional Sum of Kshs. Nine Hundred and FiftyThousand (950,000/=) only for Wood and Ornamental Panellingto Lobby walls to be omitted or expended in whole or in part atthe discretion of the Architect Item Sum 950,000.00





A Provide the Provisional Sum of Kshs. Three Million (3,000,000/=)only for Travelling and other out of pocket expenses incurredon supervision to be expended in whole or in part as authorisedby the Project Manager and approved by the Client

Item Sum 3,000,000.00

B Provide the Provisional Sum of Kshs. Ten Million (10,000,000/=)only for Contingencies to be omitted or expended in whole or inpart at the discretion of the Architect Item Sum 10,000,000.00

COLLECTION

From Page 7/1

From Above



TOTAL OF P.C & PROVISIONAL SUMSCarried to Main Summary



MAIN SUMMARY


Quantity Surveyors


BILL NO. 8

MAIN SUMMARY

BILL NO FROM PAGE SHS.

1 BILL NO 1 - PRELIMINARIES 1/29

2 BILL NO. 2 - MAIN HOUSE 2/26

3 BILL NO. 3 - SERVANT QUARTERS 3/17

4 BILL NO. 4 - CHANGING ROOMS 4/14

5 BILL NO. 5 - ABLUTION BLOCK 5/12

6 BILL NO. 6 - EXTERNAL WORKS 6/13

7 BILL NO. 7 - P.C & PROVISIONAL SUMS 7/2

Constingconsult LtdQuantity Surveyors

TOTAL FIXED TENDER SUMInclusive of VAT

CARRIED TO FORM OF TENDER

Name of Tenderer ……………………………………………………………….

Name and Signature ofAuthorised Representative ……………………………………………………..

Date ………………………………………………………………………

Name & signature of Witness …………………………………………………

Date ……………………………………………………………………...

Constingconsult LtdQuantity Surveyors

APPENDIX


Quantity Surveyors

4th February 2015

The County Secretary,County Government of Meru,P.O. Box 120 – 60200,MERU

Dear Sir/Madam,

THE PROPOSED GOVERNOR’S MANSION FOR MERU COUNTY AT MERU

SUB: ARRANGEMENT OF THE TENDER DOCUMENTS

Please find the tender documents for your use as requested. We also wish to comment as follows:

The tender documents are in PDF format only.

The PDFs have been arranged numerically for ease of locating them, i.e. (1 - 20B)

Ensure that when they are printed they are arranged in the order of their numbers asabove. This is how the finalized tender document should be.

Yours faithfully,

K & M Archplans

JAMES KIMATHI